Chevrolet 1994 Blazer Owner`s manual

7 9 9 4
S U B U R B A N
A N D
B L A Z E R
O W N E R ’ SM A N U A L
INTRODUCTION
1994 Chevrolet Blazer and Suburban Owner’s Manual
Welcome
This manual was prepared to acquaint you with the operation and
maintenance of your 1994 Chevrolet Blazer or Suburban and to provide
important safety information. There is also a Chevrolet Truck Warranty and
Owner Assistance Information booklet. In some vehicles, there can be
information manuals from othermanufacturers like body builders or special
equipment companies. We urge you to review all these publications
carefully. This will help you enjoy safe and trouble-free operation of your
vehicle.
When it comes to service, keep in mind that yourChevrolet dealer knows
your vehicle best and is interested in your complete satisfaction. Your dealer
invites you to return for all of your service needs both during and after the
warranty period.
Remember, if you have a concern ana need help handling it to your
satisfaction, see the procedure in the Chevrolet Truck Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information booklet.
Thanks forchoosing a Chevrolet product. We value you as a member of the
Chevrolet family. We want to assure you of our continuing interest in your
pleasure and satisfaction with your vehicle.
Chwrolet Motor Division
General Motors Corporation
30007 Van Dyke Ave.
Warren, Michigan
@Copyright 1993 General Motors Corporation, Chevrolet Motor Division.
All Rights Reserved
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
i
important Notes to Owners and Drivers
. ...About DrivingYour Blazer:
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read the
“on-pavement” and “off-road” driving guidelines in this manual. (See
“Driving Guidelines” and “Off-Road Driving With Your Four-wheel
Drive Vehicle” in the Index.)
....About This Manual:
Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it
when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in
it so the new owner can use it.
This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We
reserve the right to make changes in the productafter that time without
further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux proprietuires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de
ce guide en francais chez votre concessionaire ou au DGN Marketing
Services Ltd., 1500 Bonhill Rd., Mississauga, Ontario L5T lC7.
Ge.nera1Motors, GM, the GM Emblem, Chevrolet, the Chevrolet emblem,
Blazer, and Suburban are registered trademarks of GeneralMotors
Corporation.
..
11
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
UTILITY
I
WAGON
...
111
Table of Contents
Introduction - How to Use this Manual
This section tells you howto use your manual and includes safety
and vehicle damage warnings and symbols.
Section 1
- Seats and Safety Restraints
This section tells you how to use yourseats and safety restraints
properly.
Section 2
- Features & Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
Section 3 - Comfort Controls & Audio Systems
This section tells you howto adjust the ventilation and comfort
controls and how to operate your audio system.
Section 4 - Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and
how to drive under different conditions.
Section 5 - Problems on the Road
This section tells you what todo if you have a problem while
driving, such as a flat tire or engine overheating.
Section 6 - Service & Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running
properly and looking good.
Section 7-
Schedule Maintenance Services
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and
what fluids and lubricants to use,
Section 8
- Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact your GM division for
assistance and how to get service publications. It also gives you
information on “Reporting Safety Defects” o n page 8-4.
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this
manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
iv
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they
first receive their new vehicle. This will help you learn about thefeatures
and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and
words work together to explain thingsquickly.
INDEX: A good place to look for what you need is the Index in back of the
manual. It’s an alphabetical list of all that’s in the manual,and the page
number where you’ll find it.
SECTION 1-6: Each section of this manual begins with a brief list of its
contents, so you can often find at a glance if a section contains the
information you want.
SECTION 7:This section of the manual covers the maintenance required
for your vehicle.
SECTION 8 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE:This section includes
important information about reportingsafety defects and gives you details
about the “Roadside Assistance’’program. You will also find customer
satisfaction phone numbers (including customersatisfaction numbers for the
hearing and speech impaired) as well as the mediatiodarbitration procedure.
We’ve also included ordering information for service publications in this
section.
Safety Warnings andSymbols
You will find a number of safetycautions in this book. We use a box with
gray background and the wordCAUTION to tell you about things that could
hurt you if you wereto ignore the warning.
In the gray caution area,we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you
what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read thesecautions. If
you don’t, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle with a slash throughit in this book.This safety
symbol means “Don’t,” “Don’t do this,” or “Don’t let this happen.”
1
vi
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean thereis something that coulddamage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty,
and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals,you might see CAUTION and NOTICE
warnings in different colors orin different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use yellow for
cautions, blue for notices and the words CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you will find on your vehicle. For example.
these symbols are used on an original battery:
1
Caurron
Possible Injury
Protect Eyes
by Shielding
Caustic Batrery Acid
Could Cause Burns
I
Avoid Sparks
or Flames
vi i
I
Spark or Flame Could
Explode Battery
These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your
vehicle is driven:
I
Fasten Safety
Belts
C
I
Door 1ock/Unlock
These symbols have to do with your lights:
A
I
Master Lighting
Switch
Turn Signal
Direction
1
U
Hazard Warning
Flasher
Headlight
High Beam
0
Parking Lights
Fog Lights
Daytime
Running Lights
...
Vlll
Off
These symbols are on some of your controls:
I\J
I
I
Windshield
Washer
Windshield
Wiper
Windshield
Rear Window Wiper
Defroster
1
3c
r l
i
Rear Window
Washer
Ventilating Fan
Rear Window
Defogger
Hatch
Release
These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights:
p3
I
I
BafteryCharging
Engine Coolant
Temperature
BRAKE
I
Engine Oil
Pressure
System
I
ANTILOCK
I
Brake
Fuel
I
4 Wheel
RELEASE
ix
SHIFT
1
Parking Brake
Release
Anti-Lock
I
Shift Light
Here are some other symbols you may see:
n
Fuse
Hood Release
iighker
X
Horn
Seats & Safety Belts
Section
Here you'll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use
your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should
not do with safety belts.
Seats and Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Frontseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 4
Rearseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Safety Belts: They're For Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
. . . . . . . . . 1-14
Why Safety Belts Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
. . . . . 1-18
How To Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-19
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
1-31
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
....................
1-31
Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Larger Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1-42
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Replacing Safety Belts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats - how to adjust them, and fold them up
and down, It also tells you about reclining front seatbacks and head
restraints.
Front Seats
Manual FrontSeat
If your vehicle has a
manual bucket, split
bench, or full bench
seat, you can adjust it
with this lever at the
front of the seat.
Slide thelever at the front of the seat toward the outer seat support to unlock
it. Using your body, slide the seat to whereyou want it. Then, release the
lever and try to move the seat with your body, to make sure the seat is
locked into place.
Power Seat
If your vehicle has a
power seat on the
driver’s side, you can
adjust it with this
switch at the front of
the seat.
You can use the center switch knob to move the seat where you want it. To
raise the seat, move the center switch knob up. To lower the seat, move the
center switch knob down. To move the seat forward, move the center switch
knob toward the inside of the vehicle. To move the seat rearward, move the
center knob toward the outside of the vehicle.
You can also raise and lower the front and rear of the seat. To raise the front
of the seat, move the inner switch lever up. To lower the front of the seat
move the inner switch lever down. To raise the rear of the seat, move the
outer switch lever up. To lower the rear of the seat, move the outer switch
lever down.
Reclining Front Seatback (Bucket
or Split Bench Seat)
To adjust the seatback,
lift the front of this
lever.
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it. Pull up on the
front of the lever and the seatback will go to an upright position.
Don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
1-3
A .CAUTION:
- 9
:..
-I-
.*
Head Restraints
r
Slide the head
restraint up or down
so that the top of the
restraint is closest to
the top of your ears.
a
.. .
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Seatback Latches
(Reclining Split Bench and Reclining Bucket
Seats)
The front seatback folds forward to let you access the rear of the vehicle.
To fold the seatback
forward, lift this lever.
Lift the front of the
lever and the seatback
will fold forward. To
return the seatback to
the upright position,
push the seatback
rearward until it
latches.
I
After returning the seatback to its upright position, pull the seatback forward
to make sure it is locked.
1-5
Easy h t r y Seat (Utility Model FrontSeats)
The driver and passenger front bucket seat and 40/60
the split bench seat of
your vehicle hasan easy entry feature.This makes it easy to get in and outof
the rear seat.
To operate the seat,
pull forward on the
top of the lever,
located at the side of
the seatback, andtilt
the back forward
toward the front of the
vehicle.
When you do, the seat
bottom will release.
Just pull or push the
seat forward untilit
stops.
To return the seatto
its regular position,
return the seatbackto
its upright position,
then push the whole
seat rearward untilit
latches.
After returning the seat to its regular position, try to move the seat with your
body, to make sure the seat is locked into place.
1-6
Rear Seats
Easy Entry Seat (Wagon Model Second
Seat)
The right side of the rear 60/40 split folding bench seat, available in the
wagon model, has an easy entry feature. That makes it easy to get in and out
of the third seat, if you have one.
the seatback toward
the front of the
vehicle.
When you do, the seat bottom will release. Just pull or push the seat forward
until it stops.
To return the seat to its regular position, return the seatback to its upright
position, then push the whole seat rearward until it latches.
After returning the seat to its regularposition, try to move the seat with your
body, to make sure the seat is locked into place.
Rear Folding Seat (Utility Model)
If your vehicle has a rear seat, the seatcan be folded flat for morecargo
space. Before folding, make sure nothing is under or in front of the seat.
When the seat is folded, it will layflat on the floor.
To fold the seat, pull
on the lever at the
front of the seat
cushion marked
RELEASE.
Then, using the handle
at the side of the
seatback, pull the
seatback forward and
fold it into the seat
cushion.
....
While the seat is in the folded position, hang thelarch plate end of theouter
passenger position safety belts on the hooks at the top of each retractor
cover, out of the way.
To return the seatto the passenger position, just lift up on the seatback and
push it rearward until it latches.
After returning theseat to the passenger position, pull forwardon the
seatback to make sure itis locked in place. Also, return the safety belts
to their original position, so they will be available for rear seat passengers
to use.
1-8
Folding Second Seat (Wagon Models)
If your vehicle has a 60/40 second seat, either side may be folded down to
give you more cargo space. Before folding, push the buckle portion of the
safety belt down into the seat cushion pockets, out of the way.Also, make
sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat. When the seat is folded, it
will lay flat on the floor.
To fold the seat, push
down on the lever at
the outer side of the
seat cushion and,
using the handle
mounted on the side
of the seat, pull the
seat cushion up and
fold itforward.
After folding the seat
cushion fully forward.
push down on the
lever again and fold
the seatback forward
until it isflat.
1-9
To create a load floor,
release the panels
from the seatback by
pushing rearward on
the latch, and fold
them out to cover the
rear seat footwell.
To return the seat to
the passenger position,
lift the loadfloor
panels and latch them
into the seatback.
I
Then, lift the seatback up and push rearwarduntil it latches. Lower the seat
cushion until it latches in position.
After returning the seat to the passenger position, pull forwardon the
seatback and up on the seat cushion handleto make sure the seat is locked in
place. Also, pull the safety belt bucklesout of the seat cushion pockets, so
they will be available for rear seat passengers to use.
Removable Rear(Third) Seat (Wagon Models)
If your vehicle has a rear seat, it can be takenout for more cargo space.
Before removing the seat, unlatch the outside passenger position safety belts
from the seat frame.
1-10
To unlatch the safety
belt, press in on the
inside of the buckle
cover sleeve and pull
the latch plate out of
Then, hang the latch
plate end of the belt
on the hook at the top
of the retractor cover,
out of the way.
To remove the seat, fully open the rear load doors and enter the back of the
vehicle.
Move the seatback
release lever, at the
right rear of the seat,
toward the center of
the vehicle.
1-11
Then, fold the
seatback forward into
the seat cushion.
To unlatch the seat
from the floor, pull up
on the center release
handle at the rear of
the seat and lift the
rear of theseat up, out
of the floor.
Turn the seat sideways and takeit out of the vehicle.
To put the seat back in, hold the seat sideways and put it into the vehicle.
Turn the seat to the forward position and set it down, with the latches at the
bottom of the seat over the hooks in the floor. Pull up on the center release
handle and let the seat drop into place.Release the handle to let the seat
latch close and make sure it locksinto place. Then, move the seatback
release lever at the right rearof the seat toward thecenter of the vehicle and
raise the seatback.
After returning the seatbackto the upright position, push the seatback
forward to make sure it is locked in place.
Then, return the outside passenger position safety belts to the seat frame
buckles, so they will be available for rearseat passengers to use.
1-12
Safety Belts: They’re For Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. Italso
tells you some things you should not do with safety belts.
This figure lights up as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety Belt Reminder
Light” in the Index.)
It will light when you turn the key to RUN or START when your safety belt
isn’t buckled, and you’ll heara tone or buzzer, too.
1-13
In many states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts.
Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t
know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. But mostcrashes are in between. In
many of them, people who buckle up cansurvive and sometimes walk away.
Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In
most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!
Why Safety BeltsWork
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
For example, if the
bike is going 10 mph
(1 6 k d h ) , so is the
child.
1-14
When the bike hits the
block, it stops. But the
child keeps going!
1
Take the simplest
“vehicle.” Suppose it’s
just a seat on wheels.
Put someone on it.
...
1-15
Get it up to speed.
Then stop the
"vehicle." The rider
doesn't stop.
windshield ...
or the instrument
panel ...
1-16
or thesafety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to
stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces.
That’s why safety belts make such good sense.
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts-and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
ifI’m wearing a
safety belt?
A:
You could be - whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you
can easily unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And
your chance of being conscious duringand after an accident, so you
can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q : Why don ’t
theyjust putin air bagsso people won’t have to wear
safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in somevehicles today and will be in more of them in the
future. But they are supplemental systemsonly - so they work with
safety belts, not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for
sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehiclethat
has air bags, you still haveto buckle up to get the most protection.
That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and
other collisions.
1-17
Q: If I’m a good driver,
andI never drivefar from home, why should I
wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident - even
one that isn’t your h u l t - you and your passengers can be hurt. Being
a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your control,
such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the
greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 k d h ) .
Safety belts are for everyone.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is
turned to “Run” or
“Start,” a light will
come on for about
eight seconds to
remind people to
fasten their safety
belts.
Unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled,a tone will also sound.
How To Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety beltsand
children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies.If a
child will be riding in your Vehicle, see the section after this one, called
“Children.” Follow those rulesfor everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-18
Driver Position
This section describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly.
1-19
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up
straight.
L1
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. (On some models,
you may hear a clicking sound as the belt is pulled out. The clicking
sound is the shoulder belt tension feature operating properly.) Don’t let
the belt get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch
plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t longenough, see “Safety Belt Extender’’ at the end
of
this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckleis positioned so you would be
able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
1-20
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
n
A:
n
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection
this way.
1-21
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-22
A:
The belt is over an armrest.
1-23
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the
shoulder at all times.
1-24
Q: What’s wrong with this?
I
A:
1
1
I
8
The belt is twisted across the body.
1 A CAUT1.ON:
I
To unlatch the belt,
just push the button on
the buckle. The belt
should go back out of
theway.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the
door on it, you can damage both the belt andyour vehicle.
1-25
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear
safety belts.
A pregnant woman
should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should
be worn as low as
possible throughout
the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt
is worn properly, it’s more likely thatthe fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the keyto making safety belts effectiveis
wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger’s safety belt worksthe same way as the driver’s
safety belt. See “Driver Position,” earlier in this part.
When the lap portion of the belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it
does, let it go back all the way and start again.
1-26
Center Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone can sit in the center
positions.
When you sit in a
center seating
position, you have a
lap safety belt, which
has no retractor. To
make the belt longer,
tilt the latch plate and
pull it along the belt.
1-27
To make the belt
shorter, pull its free
end as shown until the
belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a
lap-shoulder belt. If the beltisn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender”
at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be
able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics
show that unbelted peoplein the rear seat arehurt more often in crashes
than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted canbe thrown out of the vehiclein
a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
Rear Seat OutsidePassenger Positions
1-28
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s howto
wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get
twisted.
2 . Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If the belt stops
before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until
you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safcty Belt Extender” at the end of
this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would
be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as
you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-29
The lappart of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just
touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
To unlatch the belt,
just push the button on
the buckle.
1-30
Children
Everyone in a vehicle
needs protection! That
includes infants and
all children smaller
than adult size.
i
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
I Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
1-31
I
I
1-32
Child Restraints
Be sure tofollow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints
use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. The
instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how
to do that.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the
rear rather than the front seat. We at General Motors therefore recommend
that you put your child restraint in the rear seat unless the child is an infant
and you’re the only adult in the vehicle. In that case, you might want to
secure the restraint in the front seat where you can keep an eye on the baby.
Wherever you install it, besure to secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child is in it.
Top Strap
If your child restraint
has a top strap, it
should be anchored.
If you need to have an anchor installed, you can ask your Vehicle dealer to
put it in foryou. If you want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can
tell you how to do it.
1-33
Securing a Child Restraint ina Rear Outside Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier section about the top
strap if the child restraint has one.
I . Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child
restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say.
3. Pull out the vehicle’s safety belt. Make the belt as long as possible by
tilting the latch plate and pullingit along the belt.
4. Run the lap and
shoulder portions
through or around
the restraint. The
child restraint
instructions will
show you how. If
the shoulder belt
goes in front of
the child’s face or
neck, put it
behind the child
restraint.
1-34
5. Buckle the belt.
Make sure the
release button is
positioned so you
would be able to
unbuckle the
safety belt
quickly if you
ever had to.
6. To tighten the
belt, pull up on
the shoulder belt
while you push
down on the child
restraint.
7. Push and pull the
child restraint in
different
directions to be
sure it is secure.
. ..
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let
it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
1-35
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Seat Position
When you secure a child restraint in a center seating position, you’ll be
using the lap belt.
See the earlier section about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
I
1. Make the belt as
long as possible
by tilting the
latch plate and
pulling it along
the belt.
2 . Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child
restraint.
3. Secure the child in thechild restraint as the instructions say.
4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
I
1-36
5. Buckle the belt.
Make sure the
release button is
positioned so you
would be able to
unbuckle the
safety belt
quickly if you
ever had to.
6. To tighten the belt, pull itsfree end while you push down on the child
restraint.
7 . Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is
secure. If the child restraint isn’t secure, turn the latch plate over and
buckle it again. Then see if it is secure. If it isn’t, secure the restraint in
a different place in the vehicle and contact the child restraint maker for
their advice about how to attach the childrestraint properly.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt.It will
be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraintin the Right Front Seat
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier section about the top
strap if the child restraint hasone.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child
restraint.
2 . Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say.
1-37
3, Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the
vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it
behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt.
Make sure the
release button is
positioned so you
would be able to
unbuckle the
safety belt
quickly if you
ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of
the lap belt allthe
way out of the
retractor to set
the lock.
U
1-38
6 . To tighten the
belt, feed the lap
belt back into the
retractor while
you push down
on the child
restraint.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt andlet
it goback all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
1-39
Larger Children
Children who have
outgrown child
restraints should wear
the vehicle’s safety
belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can
wear a lapshoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the
rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash.
0
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are.
A
2: What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt, but the child isso
small that the shoulder belt is very close
to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the
child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is so small that the shoulder belt is still veryclose to the child’s
face or neck, you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap
belt, if your vehicle has one.
1-41
Wherever the child sits, thelap portion of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs.This applies belt force to
the child’s pelvic bones ina crash.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’tlong enough to fasten, your dealer willorder you an
extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be
just foryou, and just for theseat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t
let
someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it ismade to fit. To wear it,
just attach it tothe regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors,
anchorages and reminder systems are working properly. Look for any loose
parts or damage. If you see anything that might keep a restraint system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Replacing Safety Belts After
a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if thebelts were
stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you
need new belts.
If you ever see a label on a right front safety belt that says to replace the
belt, be sure to do so. Then the new belt will be there to help protect you in
an accident. You would see this label on the belt near the door opening.
I
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean
you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New
parts and repairs may be necessary evenif the belt wasn’t being used at the
time of the collision.
1-43
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A:
The belt is torn.
Torn or frayed belts may not protect youin a crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Before replacing any safety belt, see your dealer for thecorrect part number.
You’ll need the model year and model number for your vehicle. The model
year is on your title and registration. And you can find the model number on
the Certificatioflire label of your vehicle. See “Certificatioflire Label” in
the Index.
I
The model number on
the replacement belt
must be listed on the
safety belt youwant to
replace. Pull the
shoulder belt all the
way out to see this
label.
Features & Controls
Section
r
L
1
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your
vehicle. and information on starting. shifting and braking . Also explained
are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything
is working properly-and what to do if you have a problem .
For explanationof vehicle symbols. refer to “Vehicle
Symbols” in the
Introduction
.
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Your Doors
and
How
They
Work
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Side Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Tailgate.Tailgate Glass and Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
PanelDoors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Ignition Switch
....................................
. 2-12
. 2-13
Starting Your Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving Through Deep Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Starting Your Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Automatic Transmission
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Five-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
LockingRearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-26
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 2-26
2-1
........................
. . . 2-30
EngineExhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked .....................
2-31
Four-WheelDrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
Transfer Case ............................................. 2-33
Front Axle Locking Feature ..................................
2-34
2-35
Windows ................................................
Parking Over Things That Burn
H o ....................................................
~
2-37
.............................................
2-37
2-38
Multifunction Lever ........................................
2-39
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-40
Headlight High-Low Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wipers .........................................
240
2-41
Windshield Washer ........................................
2-42
Cruise Control ...........................................
Headlights and Vehicle Lighting ..............................
247
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-51
2-53
SunVisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Wiper and Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Cigarette
LightedAshtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Compartments ......................................
2-56
2-64
Instrument Cluster .........................................
Warning and Indicator Lights ..............................
2-66
Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-74
Luggagecarrier ...........................................
2-79
Trailer Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Tiltwheel
Keys
-
i
2-3
The square-shaped
key is for the ignition
only.
The oval-shaped key
is for the doors and all
other locks.
.
:.
\
\
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the plugs from the
keys, and gives them to the first owner.
Each plug has a code on it that tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith
how to make extra keys. Keep the plugs in a safe place. If you lose your
keys, you’ll be able to have new ones made easily using these plugs.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a numberof new features that can help prevent
of trouble getting into your vehicle
theft. But you can have a lot
if you ever lock your keys inside.You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in.So be sure you have extra keys.
2-4
Door Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle:
From the outside: Use
your door key.
2-5
From the inside: To
lock the door,slide the
lever on yourdoor
down.
To unlock the door,
slide the lever up.
Power Door Locks (Option)
Press the bottom of
the power door lock
switch, marked
LOCK, on either
front door to lock all
the doors at once.
Press the switch
marked UNLOCK to
unlock all the doors at
once.
On four-door models, the switch on each rear door works only thatdoor’s
lock. It won’t lock (or unlock) all of the doors - that’s a safety feature.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the
locks from inside. Then get out and close the door.
2-6
Your Doors and How They Work
Side Doors
To open the door from
the outside, pull the
handle up and pull the
door open.
To open the door from
the inside, pull the
lever toward you and
push the door open.
2-7
Tailgate Glass, Tailgate and Rear Doors
into your vehicle.You can't see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
I
tailgate, or rear doors:
into your ve :le. See"Comfort Controls'' in the Fdex.
&
Tailgate Glassand Tailgate
If your vehicle has a tailgate, you must raisethe rear glass beforelowering
the tailgate.
To open the glass
from the outside, use
your door key. With
the key in the lock,
turn the key to the
To release the glass from the inside, use the electric tailgate glass release
switch on the instrument panel. For more information, see ''TailgateElectric Glass Release" in the Index.
2-8
Open the tailgate by lifting up on the handle while pulling the tailgate
toward you.
Close the tailgate before closing the rear glass. After closing, make sure the
tailgate is securely latched by pulling it toward you. After closing the rear
glass, pull up on its handle to make sure it is locked.
Panel Doors
To open the rear panel doors on the wagon model, you must open the right
door first. If the door is locked, insert your door key in the lock and turn it
to the left to unlock it.
To open the right
door, pull up on the
handle and pull the
door open.
To open the left door,
first open the right
door. Then, pull the
handle on the left door
edge outand pull the
door open.
2-9
The rear doors have a check assembly to keep them from fully opening
during normal use. To fully open theeither rear door, you must release the
check strap.
First, open the door part way until the white markon the check strap is fully
outside the door edge. If the end of the strap catches the pin on the door, the
door is open too far,
Then, hold the strap at
the white mark, pull
the strap toward you
and open thedoor all
the way.
To re-engage the door check strap, just close the door and the strap will
catch the pin.
To close the doors, close the left door first. After securely closing the left
door, close the right door. Makesure both doors are latched securely.
To lock the rear doors from outside the vehicle, put yourdoor key in the
lock and turn it to the right.If you have power doorlocks, you can lock the
side doors as well as the rear doorsfrom inside the vehicle. For more
information, see “Power Door Locks” in this section.
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your
vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, thereare ways you can
help.
Key in the lgnition
If you walk away from your vehiclewith the keys inside, it’san easy target
for joy riders or professional thieves - so don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the
driver’s door, you’ll hear a tone
reminding you to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you.
Always do this. Your steering wheel will be locked, andso will your
ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking your key out also
locks your transmission. And remember to lock the
doors.
2- 10
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember
to keep your valuables out of sight. Put them in a storage area, or take them
with you.
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best
to lock it up and take your keys. But what if you haveto leave your ignition
key? Whatif you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area or console.
Lock the console.
0
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
Then take the door key with you.
New Vehicle “Break=/#”
NOTICE:
Your modern vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate “break-in.” But
it will perform betterin the long run if you followthese
guidelines:
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first
500 miles (804 km).
0
Don’t drive at any one speed- fast or slow -for the first
500 miles (804 km), Don’tmake full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322km) or
so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new liningscan mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this “breaking-in” guideline
every time you get new brake linings,
2-11
Ignition Switch
Use your square keyto start your vehicle. The -square key lets you turn the
ignition switch to five different positions:
1. OFF
I
2
2. RUN
3
5
3. START
4. ACC
5 . LOCK
ACC (Accessory): ACClets you use things like the radio and the
windshield wipers when the engine isoff. To get intoACC, push in the key
will remain locked,just as it
and turn it toward you. Your steering wheel
was beforeyou inserted the key.
LOCK: This positionlocks your ignition, steering wheeland transmission.
It’s atheft deterrent feature.You will only be able to remove your key
when
the ignition is turned LOCK.
to
OFF: This position letsyou turn off the enginebut still turn the steering
wheel. Use OFF if you must have your vehiclein motion while the engine
is off (for example, if your vehicle is being pushed).
RUN: This isthe position for driving.
START This starts your engine.
2- 12
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in “LOCK” and
you can’t turn it, be
sure itis all theway in. If it is, then turn the steeringwheel left
and right whileyou turn thekey hard. But turn thekey only
with your hand.Using a tool to forceit could break thekey or
the ignition switch.If none of this works, then yourvehicle needs
service.
Key Release Lever
The ignition key
cannot be removed
from the ignition of
. .
manual transmission
vehicles unless the
To Remove the Key
On manual transmission vehicles, turn the key to the LOCK position while
pressing the key release lever down (see thecaution earlier in this section
about the key release lever). Keeping your finger on the lever, pull the key
straight out.
On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the key to LOCK and pull it
straight out.
Starting Your Gasoline Engine
If you have a diesel engine, see “Starting Your Diesel Engine” in the Index.
Engines start differently. The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) shows the code letter or number for your engine. You will
find the VIN at the top left of yourinstrument panel. (See “Vehicle
Identification Number” in the Index.) Follow the proper steps to start the
engine.
2-13
Automatic Transmission:
Move your shift lever to “ P ’ (Park) or “N” (Neutral). Your engine won’t
start in any other position - that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re
already moving, use “ N ’ (Neutral) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to
“P” (Park) if your vehicle is moving.If you
do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to “P” (Park) only
when your vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission:
Hold the clutch pedal to thefloor, then shift your gear selector to neutral
while starting the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedalis not
all the waydown - that’s a safety feature.
To start your 5.7 Liter (Code K ) or 7.4 Liter (Code N ) V8 engine:
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition keyto
START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will
go down as your engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in “Start” for longer than
15 seconds ata time
will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the
excessive heat can damage
your starter motor.
2 . If it doesn’t start right away, hold yourkey in START. If it doesn’t start
in threeseconds, push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the
way down for 12 more seconds, or until it starts.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be
flooded with too much gasoline. Try this:
Wait 15 seconds to let the starter motor cool down. Then push your
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor. Hold it there. Then holdthe
key in “Start” for no more than ten seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. If the engine still doesn’t start, wait another
15 seconds and do Step 3 again.
Hot Engine Restart (Vehicles With 5.7L LO5 Engine and Over 8500 lbs.
GVWR): If your engine is already hot and then stalls, turn your ignition
key to OFF. Then, turn your key to ON, and wait about20 seconds
before you restart your engine.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator pedal.
2- 14
If your engine is already hot and then stalls, turn your ignition key to OFF.
Then turn your key to RUN and wait 20 seconds before you restart your
engine. When the engine starts, let go of the key and the acceleratorpedal.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your
vehicle. If youadd electrical parts oraccessories, you could
change the way the fuel injection system operates. Before adding
electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you don’t, your
engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, seethe part of this
manual that tells how to do itwithout damaging your vehicle.
See “Towing Your Vehicle”in the Index.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quicklythrough deep puddles or standing water,
water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly
damage your engine. If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Water (Diesel Engines)
NOTICE:
Never drive through standing water more than 8 inches deep if
your vehicle has a diesel engine.Also, don’t drive through any
standing water faster than5 mph (8 km/h). If you do,water can
be drawn in through the air intake, and this can severely
damage your engine.
2-15
Driving In Snow (Diesel Engines)
When driving in a heavy snowstorm or in swirling snow witha diesel
engine, snow can get intothe air intake system. If you keep driving in these
conditions the air cleaner may get plugged, causing black smoke andloss of
power. In an emergency, if the air cleaner gets plugged with snow, youcan
remove the air cleaner. Then, drive to a place of safety as soon as possible
and put the air cleaner back on.
Starting Your Diesel Engine
Your diesel engine starts differently than a gasoline engine.
1. Automatic Transmission:
Move your shift lever to “ P ’ (Park)or “N” (Neutral). Your engine
won’t start in any other position - that’s a safety feature. To restart
when you’re already moving, use “N” (Neutral) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to 4‘P’’(Park) if your vehicleis moving. If you
do, you could damage the transmission. Shift“P”
to (Park) only
when your vehicleis stopped.
2. Manual Transmission:
Move your shift lever to neutral and hold the clutch pedal tothe floor
while starting the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedalis
not all the way down - that’s a safety feature.
Turn your ignition key to RUN. Don’t turn it to START.
With the ignition in RUN, the “GLOW PLUGS” light will come on. If
the engine is already warm, this light may not come on. That’s normal.
During starting, your “GLOW PLUGS” light may go on and off a few
times. This is normal. This means that partof your engine is being
warmed up forbetter starting. When the light goes off, yourengine is
ready to start. Do not start the engine with this light on.
NOTICE:
If the “GLOW PLUGS” light stays on, it means that your
vehicle could have oneof several problems,so you should have it
serviced right away.
2-16
3. If this light does not come on, orthe instant the light goes off, turn your
ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in “Start” for longer than 15 seconds at a time
will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the
excessive heat can damage your starter motor.
4. If the engine does not start after 15 seconds of cranking, turn the
ignition key to OFF. Wait one minute for the starter to cool, then try
the same steps again.
If you’re trying to start your engine after you’ve run out of fuel, follow the
steps in “Running Out of Fuel” (see “Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel
System” in the Index).
When your engine is cold, let it run for a few minutes before you move your
vehicle. This letsoil pressure build up. Your engine will sound louder when
it’s cold.
NOTICE:
If you’re not in an idling vehicle and theengine overheats, you
wouldn’t bethere tosee the coolant temperature gage. This
could damage your vehicle. Don’t letyour engine run when
you’re not in your vehicle.
Cold Weather Starting (Diesel Engine)
The followingtips will help you get good starting in cold weather.
Use SAE low-30 oil when the outside temperaturedrops below freezing.
When the outside temperature dropsbelow 0°F (-I S’C), use your engine
coolant heater.
If you park your vehicle in a garage,you shouldn’t need to use the coolant
heater until the garage temperaturegoes below 0°F (-1 Sac),no matter how
cold it is outside.
2- 17
To use the engine coolantheater, first turn off the engine. Then open the
hood, unwrap the electrical cord and plug itin. It uses normal house voltage
(1 10 volts), but:
NOTICE:
After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure to store the cord in
the manner it was, to help keep it away from moving engine
parts. If you don’t, itcould be torn and damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer
depends on the weather, the kind of oil youhave, and some other things.
Follow this chart.
Engine Coolant HeaterUsage
Viscosity/
Oil Grade
32°F to 0°F
(o0Cto -18°C)
0°F to -10°F
(-18°C to-23°C)
Below -10°F
Below -23°C
SAE
1OW-30
SAE
15W-40
Not
Required
Not
Required
Two
Hours*
Two
Hours*
Eight Hours*
or Overnight
Eight Hours*
or Overnight
*The times listed are minimum times. It will not harmeither the coolant
heater or the vehicle to leave the coolantheater plugged in longer than the
times stated.
For best results in cold weather, use Number 1-D diesel fuel or a
“winterized” Number 2-D fuel.
2-18
If Your Diesel Engine Won’t Start
If you’ve run out of fuel, look at “Running Out of Fuel” (see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System”in the Index).
If you’re not out of fuel, and your engine won’t start, do this:
Turn your ignition key to RUN. Make sure that the “GLOW PLUGS” light
is out. Then turn theignition key to START.
If the light doesn’t gooff, wait a few seconds, then try starting your engine
again. And, see your dealer as soon as you can for a starting system check.
If the light comeson and then goes off and you know your batteries are
charged, but your engine still won’t start, your vehicle needs service.
If the light does not come on when the engine iscold, your vehicle needs
service.
If your batteries don’t have enough charge to start your engine, see
“Battery” in the Index.
Be sure you have the right oil for your engine, and that you’ve changed the
oil at the proper times. If you use the wrong oil, your engine may be harder
to start.
If the enginestarts, runs a short time, then stops, your vehicle needs service.
Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater)
2- 19
In very cold weather,0°F (- 1 8 “C)or colder, the engine coolant heater can
help. You’ll get easier starting and betterfuel economy during engine
warn-up. Usually, the coolant heatershould be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To use the coolant heater:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1 10-volt outlet.
I
I
NOTICE:
After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure to store the cord as
If
it was beforeto keep it away from moving engine parts.you
don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer
depends on the weather, the kind of oilyou have, and someother things.
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact aGM
dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give
you the best advice for that particular area.
2-20
Automatic Transmission
There are several
different positions for
your shift lever.
0
P (Park)
This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start
your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.
2-21
R (Reverse)
Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to“R” (Reverse) while your vehicle is moving forward
“R” only after your
could damage your transmission. Shift to
vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand
without damaging your transmission, see “If You’re Stuck: In Sand,
Mud, Ice orSnow’’ in the Index.
N (Neutral)
In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart
when you’re already moving, use “ N ’ (Neutral) only. Also, use “ N ’
(Neutral) when your vehicle is being towed.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out
of “P”
(Park) or“N” (Neutral) with the engine racing isn’t covered
by
your warranty.
0
@ (Automatic Overdrive)
This position is for normal driving. If you need more powerfor
passing, and you’re:
-
I
Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
2-22
-
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
@ should not be used when towing atrailer, carrying aheavy load,
driving on steep hills, or foroff road driving. Select “D” (third gear)
when operating thevehicle under any of these conditions.
D (Third Gear)
This islike @, but you never go into Overdrive.You should use when
towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, driving on steep hills, or for
off-road driving.
2 (Second Gear)
This position gives you more power but lower fueleconomy. You can
use “2”on hills. It canhelp control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off
and on. If you manually select “2”,the transmission will drive in
second gear. You may use this feature forreducing torque to the rear
wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on
slippery road surfaces.
1 (First Gear)
This position givesyou even more power (but lower fuel economy)
than “2.”You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If
the selector lever is put in “1,” the transmission won’t shift into first
gear until the vehicleis going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might
happen if you werestuck invery deep sand or mud or were up
against a solid object.You could damage your transmission.
Also, if youstop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there
with onlythe acceleratorpedal. This could overheat anddamage
the transmission. Use your brakesor shift into“P” Park to hold
your vehicle in position on a hill.
2-23
Five-Speed
Manual Transmission
.
.
This is your shift
pattern. Here’s how to
operate your
transmission:
1 (First Gear)-Press the clutch pedal and shift into “I .” Then,
slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into “1” when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 k d h ) .
If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hardto shift into “1 ,” put the
shift lever in Neutral and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal
back down. Then shift into “1 .”
0
2 (Second Gear)- Press the clutch pedal as you let upon the
accelerator pedal and shift into “2.” Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
3,4 and 5 (Third, Fourth and Fifth Gears)- Shift into “3,” “4” and
“5” the same way you do for “2.” Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
0
To Stop - Let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brakepedal,
and shift to Neutral.
0
R (Reverse) -To back up, first press down the clutch pedal. Wait3-5
seconds for the internal parts to stop spinning and then, shift into “R.”
Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to “R” (Reverse) only after your vehicle is stopped.
Shifting to“R” (Reverse) whileyour vehicle is moving could
damage your transmission.
Also, use Reverse, along with the parking brake, when turningoff your
engine and parking your vehicle.
2-24
Shift Light
If you have a manual
transmission, you may
have a SHIFT light.
This light will show
you when to shift to
the next higher gear
for best fuel economy.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next higher gear if weather,
road and traffic conditions let you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate
slowly and shift when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it isnormal for the light to go on and off if you
quickly change the position of the accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when
you downshift.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Only: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive
and is equipped with a manual transmission, disregard the shift light when
the transfer case is in 4-LOW.
Manual Transmissions- Shift Speeds
If your speed drops below 20 mph (32 lun/h), or if the engine isnot running
smoothly, you should downshift to thenext lower gear. You may have to
downshift two or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for
good performance.
2-25
I NOTICE:
If you skip more than one gear when you downshift, or
youif
race the engine when you downshift, you can damage the engine,
clutch or transmission.
Locking Rear Axle
If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you additional traction on
snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It workslike a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels hasno traction and the other does, the
locking feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake:
Hold the regular brake
pedal down with your
right foot. Push down
the parking brake
pedal with your left
foot.
If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.
2-26
To release the parking brake:
Hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the
lever, locatedjust
above the parking
brake pedal, marked
RELEASE to release
the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parkingbrake is released, the brake system
warning light will go off.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes
to
overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also
damage other partsof your vehicle.
If you are towinga trailer and are parkingon any hill: See “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index. That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer
from moving.
Torque Lock
The parking brake should be set first whenever you leave the driver’s seat.
If you are parked on a hill and the transmissionis placed in “ P ’ (Park)
before the parking brake is set, theweight of the vehicle mayput too much
force on the parking pawl inthe transmission. It may be difficultto pull the
selector lever out of “P” (Park). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent this,
the parking brake should be setBEFORE moving the gear selector to “P”
(Park).
When preparing to move a vehicle parked on a hill, the selector lever should
be moved out of “P” (Park) BEFORE releasing the parking brake. Even
when on level surfaces, its a good idea to set the parking brake first before
shifting the transmission from “P”(Park).
If torque lock does occur, you may have to have another vehicle nudge your
vehicle uphill a little to take some of the pressure off the transmissionwhile
you pull the selector lever out of “ P ’ (Park).
2-27
Shifting Into “P” (Park)
(Automatic Transmission Models Only)
Steering Column Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake
pedal down with
your right foot
and setthe
parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into “P” (Park) position like this:
0
Pull the lever toward you.
0
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. If you have four-wheel drive, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear
- not in “ N ’ (Neutral)
4. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
2-28
5 . Remove the key and take it with you. If you can walk away from your
vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in “P”
(Park).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your
vehicle is in “ P ’ (Park) and your parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift
lever, be sure that the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in “N” (Neutral).
After you’ve moved the shift lever into the “P” (Park) position, hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from “P” (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that
the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into “I?” (Park).
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transmission into “P”
(Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the
parking pawl in the transmission.You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of “P” (Park). This is called “torque lock.’’ To prevent torque lock,
set the parking brake and then shift into “ P ’ (Park) properly before you
leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into ‘P’ (Park)” in the
Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of “P” (Park)
BEFORE you release the parking brake.
If “torque lock” does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push
yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of “F”’ (Park).
2-29
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission Models Only)
Before you get out of your vehicle, put your manual transmission
in “R”
(Reverse), turn off theengine, and firmly apply the parking brake .
If you have four-wheel drive, be sure your transfer case is in a drive gear.
Your vehicle could roll if it isn’t.
If you are parking on a hill, or if your pulling a trailer, see “Parking on
Hills” or “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index.
Parking Over Things That Burn
2-30
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transmission)
It’s better notto park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here
are some things to know.
2-31
If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer case is in “N” (Neutral),
your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in“P” (Park). So,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in “N” (Neutral). Follow
the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into ‘P’
(Park)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Four Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your engine’sdriving
power to all four wheels for extra traction. To get the most satisfaction out
of four-wheel drive, you must be familiar with it’s operation. Read thepart
that follows before using four-wheel drive. You should use 2H for most
normal driving conditions.
Rear-wheel antilock brakes do not work when you shift into four-wheel
drive. Your regular brakes will still work. When you shift back into
two-wheel drive, your rear-wheel antilock brakes will take over again.
2-32
NOTICE:
Driving in the4H or 4L positions for a long time
on dry or wet
pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle’s drivetrain.
Transfer Case
The transfer case shift
lever is on the floor to
the right of the driver.
Use this lever to shift
into andout of
four-wheel drive.
An indicator near the lever shows you the transfer case settings.
The front axleportion
of the indicator
diagram will light up
when you shift into
four-wheel drive.
Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting is normal. If the
indicator light does not light up, or if the front axle light does not go out
after you shift out of four-wheel drive, have your dealer check your system.
2-33
When your headlights or parking lights are on, rotate the dial to the right of
your headlight switch up to brighten, or down to dim, your transfer case
indicator light.
2H (2-Wheel High): This setting is for driving in most street and highway
situations. Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive.
4H (&Wheel High): This setting engages your front axle to help drive your
vehicle. Use 4H when you need extra traction, such as on wet or icy roads,
or in most off-road situations.
N (Neutral): Shift to this setting only when your vehicle needs to be towed
or when using a power take-off.
4L (4-Wheel Low): Thissetting also engages your front axle to give you
extra power, but should be used only for off-road driving.
You can shift from 2H to 4H or from 4H to 2H while the vehicle is moving.
Your front axle will engage faster if you take your foot off of the accelerator
for afew seconds after you shift. In extremely cold weather it may be
necessary to stop or slow the vehicle to shift out of 2H.
To shift into or out of 4L or N (Neutral):
Slow the vehicle to a roll, about 1-3 mph (2-5 k d h ) and shift your
transmission into neutral.
Shift thetransfer case shift lever in one continuousmotion.
Don’t pause in N (Neutral) as you shift the transfer case into 4L, or your
gears could clash.
Remember that driving in 4H or 4L may reduce fuel economy. Also, driving
in four-wheel drive on dry pavement could cause your tires to wear faster
and make your transfer case harder to shift.
Front Axle Locking Feature
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when you shift the transfer
case. Some delay for the axle to lock or unlock is normal. If the outside
temperature is very hot, or the vehicle has been used under harddriving
conditions, there may be a slight delay for the axle to unlock.
2-34
Windows
To open your manual
windows, turn the
hand crank on each
door to raise or lower
your side door
windows.
If you have the
optional power
windows, the controls
are on each of the side
doors.
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger windows as well. Your
power windows will work when the ignition has been turned to ACC or
RUN.
Push the rear of the switch with thepower window symbol on it to lower the
window.
Push the front of the switch with the power windowsymbol on it to raise the
window.
2-35
Hectric Tailgate Glass Release
Before operating your electric tailgate glass release, see the caution under
“Tailgate Glass, Tailgate and RearDoors” in this section.
The electric hatch
release button, located
below the headlight
switch, lets you
release the tailgate
glass. To release the
glass, slide the button
to the right untilyou
hear the latch release.
Then, lift the window
up to open.
If you have an automatic transmission,your shift lever must be in“P’
(Park) or “N”(Neutra1) for the release to work. With a manual transmission,
you must apply the parking brake for the release to work.
2-36
Horn
To sound the horn,
press the pad in the
center of the steering
wheel. The pad has a
Tilt Wheel(Option)
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you
drive.
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you
exit and enter the vehicle.
To adjust the tilt steering wheel:
2-37
0
While holding the
steering wheel,
pull the lever
toward you.
0
Move the steering
wheel to a
comfortable
level, then release
the leverto lock
the wheel in
place.
Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your:
h
I
0
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
0
Headlight High-Low Beam & Passing Signal
Windshield Wipers
0
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (Option)
2-38
Turn Signal and Lane Change lndicator
The turn signal has
two upward (for right
signal) and two
downward (for left
signal) positions.
These positions allow
you to signal a turn or
a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way upor down. When the turn is
finished, the lever will return automatically.
A green arrow on the
instrument panel will
flash in the direction
of the turn or lane
change.
To signal a lane change, justraise or lower the lever until the green arrow
starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever
will return by itself when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t flash but just stay
on, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn
signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the green
arrows don’t go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs
and a blown fuse (see “Fuses” in the Index).
2-39
Headlight High-Low Beam
To change the
headlights from low
beam to high or high
to low, pull the turn
signal lever all the
way toward you. Then
release it.
When the high beams
are on, this blue light
on the instrument
panel also will be on.
Windshield Wipers
You control the
windshield wipers by
turning the band with
the wiper symbol on
it.
2-40
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the
wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want
more cycles, hold the band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. This
can bevery useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band to the LO position. For high
speed wiping, turn the band further, toHI. To stop the wipers, move the
band to the off symbol.
Heavy snow or icecan overload your wipers. The windshield wiper motor is
protected from overload by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor
overheats due toheavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to
heavy snow, etc. maycause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and
heavy snow from the windshield before using your windshield wipers.
Windshield Washer
At the top of the lever
there's a paddle with
the word PUSH on it.
To spray washer fluid
on the windshield,
push the paddle.
0-
Washer fluid will spray as long as you push the paddle. When you let go of
the paddle, the wipers will continue to wipe for a few seconds and then
either stop orreturn to the preset speed.
Driving without washer fluidcan be dangerous. A bad mud splash can block
your vision. You could hit another vehicle or go off the road. Check your
washer fluid level often.
2-41
Remember, in freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluidcan form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
NOTICE:
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can
cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid
tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also,water
doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only 3/4 full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion, which coulddamage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t useradiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It
can damage your washer system and paint.
Cruise Control (Option)
If you haveCruise
Control, the end of
PUS your multifunction
lever will look like
this.
Gs
/
:
.
>’
With Cruise Control, you can maintain aspeed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. This can really help
on long trips. Cruise Control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph
(40 k d h ) .
2-42
When you apply your brakes, the Cruise Control shuts off.
To Set Cruise Control
Move the Cruise
Control switch to
ON.
Get up to the speed you want.
Push in the set button at the end of the lever and release it.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Get up to the speed you want.
2-43
To Resume a Sef Speed
Suppose you set your Cruise Control ata desired speed and then you apply
the brake. This, of course, shuts off the Cruise Control. But you don’t need
to reset it.
Once you’re going
about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more,
you can move the
Cruise Control switch
from ON to WA
(Resume/Accelerate)
for about half a
second.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there.
Remember, if you hold the switch atR/A longer than half a second, the
vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the
brake. You could be startled and even lose control.So unless you want to go
faster, don’t hold the switchat WA.
To lncrease Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are twoways to go to a higher speed. Here’s the first:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Push the button at
the end ofthe
lever, then release
the button and the
accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise
at the higher
speed.
2-44
Here’s the second way to go to a higher speed:
Move the Cruise
switch from ON
to WA. Hold it
there until you
get up to the
speed you want,
and then release
the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to WA.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph
( I .6 k d h ) faster.
To Reduce Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are twoways to reduce your speed while using cruise control:
Push in the
button at theend
of the lever until
you reach the
lower speed you
want, then release
it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the button for less than half
a second. Each time you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot
off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the Cruise Control speed you
set earlier.
2-45
Using Cruise Control onHills
How well your Cruise Control will work on hills depends upon your speed,
load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may
have to step onthe accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed
down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of Cruise Control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don't use Cruise Control on
steep hills.
To Get Out of Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the Cruise Control:
0
Step lightly on
the brake pedal or
push the clutch
pedal, if you have
a manual
transmission OR;
0
move the Cruise
switch to OFF.
To Erase 5peed Memory
When you turn off the Cruise Control or the ignition, your Cruise Control
set speed memory is erased.
2-46
Headlights and Vehicle Lighting
Your light switches
are on the left side of
your instrument panel.
Push the left side of the switch with the parking lights symbol on it to turn
on:
Parking Lights
Sidemarker Lights
0
Clearance Lights (if you have them)
Taillights
0
License Plate Lights
0
Instrument Panel Lights
0
Transfer Case Shift Indicator Light (if you have one)
Push the left side of the switch with the master lighting symbol on it to turn
on all the lights listed above as well as the headlights.
Push the right side of the switch with the off symbol on it to turn off your
lights.
Turn the dial atthe right of the off switch to adjust instrument panel lights.
Turning the dial all the way up untilit clicks turns on the interior lights.
You can switch your headlights from high to low beam by pulling on the
turn signal/high beam lever.
A circuit breaker protects your headlights. If you have an electrical
overload, your headlights will flicker on and off. Have your headlight
wiring checked right away if this happens.
2-47
Headlights-On Reminder
A buzzer will sound when your headlights are turned
on and your ignition is
in OFF, LOCK or ACC. If you need to use your headlights when the
ignition switch is inOFF, LOCK or ACC, the buzzer canbe turned off by
turning the interior light switch dial all theway off.
Daytime Running Lights(DRL) Indicator Light
(Canada Only)
~
If your vehicle was
first sold, when new,
in Canada, you will
have this light on the
instrument panel.
It goes on whenever
the Daytime Running
Lights are on.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The Canadian Federal Government has decided that “Daytime Running
Lights” (DRL) are a useful feature, in thatDRL can make your vehicle more
visible to pedestrians and other drivers during daylight hours.DRL are
required on new vehicles sold in Canada.
The high beam headlights willcome on at reduced brightness in daylight
when:
The ignition is on
The headlight switch is off, and
The parking brake is released.
When you turn on your headlights, the DRL will switch off and the exterior
lights will come on. When you turn off the headlights, the exterior lights
will go out and the high beams will change to the reduced brightness of
DRL again. The DRL indicator light on the instrument panel willgo on
whenever the DRL are on. This light means that only the DRL are on. When
you turn on yourexterior lights, this light willgo out.
Of course, you may still turn on the headlights any time you need to.
To idle your vehicle with theDRL off, set the parking brake.The DRL will
stay off until you release the parking brake.
2-48
Dome Lights
The dome lights will come on when you open the doors or tailgate. You can
also turn the dome lights on by turning the interior light dimmer dial all they
way up until it clicks.
You can use the dome
lamp switch, located
below the headlight
switch, to set the
dome lamps to come
on automatically or
remain off.
To turn the lights off, just press the side of the switch marked OFF. To
return the lights to automatic operation, press the side marked AUTO.
Reading Lighfs
If your vehicle has
reading lights, press
the bar next to the
light to turn the light
on. Press the bar again
to turn the light off.
2-49
If your vehicle has an
overhead console with
reading lights, they
can be swiveledto
point in thedirection
you want.
To turn the light on, press the button nextto the light with the master
lighting switch symbol on it. Press the button againto turn the light off.
Underhood Reel Light
If you have an
underhood reel light,
it is located inside the
engine compartment
on the passenger side
fender. You can useit
as a flashlight.
To use the light, pull up on the lever and pull thelight out. The cord will
unreel as you pull thelight.
2-50
When you are done
using the light, reel
the cord back into the
housing by turning the
handle.
Then, slide the light intothe holder. Press PUSH on the lever to hook the
light into theholder.
Mirrors
Inside Mirror
Push or pull the tab
under the mirror to
reduce glare from
headlights behind you
after dark.
2-51
Outside Mirrors
Adjust your outside
mirrors so you can
just see the side of
your vehicle, and have
a clear view of objects
behind you. Some
mirrors can be folded
in to enter narrow
doorways.
Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors
If you have electric mirrors, they can be adjusted to point where you want
from inside the vehicle.
Select the mirror you
want to move by
moving the center of
the switch, located on
the driver’s door
armrest, to R (right)
or L (left). Then,
adjust the mirror angle
by pressing the outer
arrows on the switch
until the mirror is
adjusted where you
want it.
2-52
Convex Outside Mirror
Your right side mirror may be convex.
A convex mirror’s surfaceis curved so you can see more from the driver’s
seat.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You can also swing them
out to help block glare at the front and side windows.
I
2-53
Your visor may have a
strap to hold small
items, such as maps.
Some visors have an
extender on the inside
edge. When the visor
is down, pull the
extender out for extra
glare coverage at the
front or side.
Some visors have
mirrors with lights.If
the mirror has lights,
they will come on
when you lift the
mirror cover.
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
The rear window
wipedwasher switch
is on your instrument
panel, to the right of
the steering wheel.
0
To turn the wiper on, slide the lever to the right.
2-54
For delay wiping, slide the lever under DELAY to the center of the rear
wiper control. The wiper will cycle every nine seconds.
For steady wiper action, move the slide lever all the way to the right.
0
To wash the window, push in on the end of the lever. Window washer
fluid will continue to spray until the lever is released. The wiper will
continue with three more wipes and then return to the setting that was
chosen before the leverwas pushed.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the windshield
washer. If the fluid level is low in the washer fluid bottle, you may not be
able to wash your rear window. If you can wash your windshield, but not
your rear window, check the fluid level.
Cigarette Lighter/Ashtrays
The front ashtray is
located at the bottom
of the instrument
panel. Pull on the
bottom of the ashtray
door to open it.
TOuse the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, andlet go. When it’s
ready, it will pop back by itself.
NOTICE:
~
Don’t holda cigarette lighter in with your hand whileis it
heating. If you do, it won’t be able toback away from the
heating element when it’s ready. That
can make it overload,
damaging the lighter and the heating element.
To remove the front ashtray, pull on the front of the ashtray insert. Then
slide the insert out of the ashtray door.
2-55
To use a rear ashtray,
pull at the topof the
ashtray door to flip the
door open.
To remove a rear ashtray, press down on the inside tabs and open thedoor
fully.
Don't put papers and other things that burn into your ashtrays. If you do,
cigarettes or othersmoking materials could set them onfire, causing
damage.
Storage Compartments
Your vehicle has a variety of storage compartments provided for your
convenience.
Glove Box
To open your glove
box, press the button
down and pull the
door open.
Two cup depressions
are provided for your
convenience.
Center Floor Console
Your vehicle may have a console compartment between the bucket seats.
To open it, just
squeeze the buttons on
both sides of the
keyhole, and pull up.
Use your round key to
lock this
compartment.
Your console also
includes a handy place
to hold cups.
2-57
Your console also has
a cup holder that
slides out, for the back
seat passengers to use.
Instrument Panel Cup Holder
If your vehicle has a full or split bench seat, you may have
a cup holder
attached to the instrument panel.
To use the cup holder,
pull the handleand
slide the cup holder
tray out until it stops.
Then, let the cup
holder swing down
into position.
To close the cup
holder, lift the front
and slide the tray all
the way in.
2-58
Center Overhead Console
Your vehicle may
have an overhead
console. Ithas storage
compartments inside
it.
Garage Door Opener Compartment
If you have a garage door opener, the front overhead compartment can be
used to conveniently store the opener.
I To install the garage
door opener, first open
the compartment door
by pressing the release
button forward.
2-59
The pegs inside the
compartment door are
used to make sure the
button on the
compartment door
will contact the
control button on the
garage door opener.
Add one peg at a time
until the PUSH button
on the compartment
door operates the
garage door opener,
with the compartment
door closed, whenyou
push the button
marked PUSH.
2-60
Now, with the
compartment door
closed, push the
button marked PUSH
again to make sure the
garage door opener
operates properly.
?
With the garage door opener positioned properly and the right number of
pegs in place, you should onlyhave topush the PUSH button slightly to
operate the opener.
Adjust the position of the garage door opener and add or remove pegs, as
needed, until the opener operates properly.
Sunglasses Compartment
The center overhead compartment can be used to conveniently store your
sunglasses.
To open the center
compartment, press
the release button
located at the rearof
the compartment door.
2-61
1
Place your sunglasses
in the compartment
door with the lenses
facing out.
Rear Compartment
The rear compartment
can be usedto store a
small item, like a
book.
To open the rear
compartment, press
the release button
located at therear of
the compartment door.
2-62
Other Storage Compartments
Your vehicle features a number of storage compartmentsfor convenient
storage of often used items
Some vehicles have
storage areas in the
instrument panel.
Use these spaces for
items such as gloves
or small books.
Some models have a
storage pocket on each
of the front doors.
You can use the
pocket to store a
variety of small items.
2-63
Instrument Panel
13
1’2
1. Side Window Defogger Vents
2. Light Controls
3. Air Vents
4. Multifunction Lever
5. Tilt Lever
6. Instrument Cluster
7. Gearshift Lever
8. Audio System
9. Comfort Control System
10. Glove Box
1 1. Audio System
12. Ashtray
13. Rear Window Defogger Switch
or Rear Heater Switch
15. Dome Light Override Switch
16. Fuse Panel
17. Parking Brake Release Handle
Instrument Cluster
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your
vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much
fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and
economically.
Tachometer Cluster
If you have the tachometer cluster,it looks different but will tellyou
everything the standard cluster does, with the addition of displaying your
engine’s revolutions per minute (rpm).
2-64
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets
you see your speed in
both miles per hour
(mph) and kilometers
per hour ( k d h ) . Your
odometer shows how
far your vehicle has
been driven, in either
miles (used in the
US.) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
..
'
-20
MPH
Tamper-Resistant Odometer
Your odometer is tamper-resistant. The odometer will show silver lines
between the numbers if someone tries to turn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer
installed. Laws vary as to the procedure that must be followed, so check
with your state or provincial vehicle registration office. But generally, if the
new odometer can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then it
must be. But if it can't, then it's set at zero, and a label must be put on the
driver's door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was
installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can
tell you how far your
vehicle has been
driven since you last
set the trip odometer
to zero.
To reset the trip odometer, fully press the reset button located near the trip
odometer readout. If the reset button is not fully pressed, the trip odometer
may not go all the way back to zero. If it doesn't, you may have to press the
reset button again to reset the readout to zero.
2-65
Tachometer
If you have a
tachometer, it displays
the engine speed in
revolutions per minute
(rpm).
4
I NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area,
your engineor other parts could be damaged.
Damage to your engine
or vehicle caused by operating the
engine in the red area isn't covered by your vehicle warranty.
Warning Lightsandl Indicators
This section describes the warning lights andgages that may be onyour
vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it
becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement.
Paying attention to your warning lights andgages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights go on when there may beor is a problem with one of your
vehicle's functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages,
some warning lights come on briefly when you turn the ignition key
just to
let you know they're working. If you are familiar with this section, you
should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may beor is a problem with one of your
vehicle's functions. Often gages and warning lights work togetherto let you
know when there's a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on whenyou are
driving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem, check the
section that tells you whatto do about it. Please follow the manual's advice.
2-66
Waiting to do repairs can be costly - and even dangerous. So please get to
know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Brake System Warning Light
The red brake system
warning light is
located at the bottom
right corner of the
instrument cluster
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part
isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking,
though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake problem. Have your
brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on as you start the vehicle. If it doesn’t come on
then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop
carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may
go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have
the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.)
The brake system warning light will also come on when you set your
parking brake, and it will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.
If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a
brake problem.
2-67
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
The orange anti-lock
brake system warning
light is located near
the top rightcorner of
the instrument cluster
mi
With anti-lock, this light will go on when you start your engine and may
stay on for several seconds. That’s normal. Ifthe light doesn’t come on,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, your vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning lightisn’t on, you still have
brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a
problem with your regular brakes.See “Brake System Warning Light’’
earlier in this part.
Water in Fuel Light
The red Water in Fuel
light, if you have one,
is located near the
middle right edge of
the instrument cluster,
just below the turn
signal and lane change
indicator.
This light will come on to warn you if there is water in the diesel fuel
system. For more information on how this light works, see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System” in the Index.
2-68
Service Throttle Soon Light
The orange Service
Throttle Soon light, if
you have one, is
located near the
middle left edge of the
instrument cluster
On diesel engines, a computer monitors the operation of the electronic
accelerator. This light should come on when the ignition is on but the engine
is not running, as a check to show you its working. If it does not come on at
all, have it fixed right away. If the light stays on after the engine starts or
comes on while you are driving, the computer is indicating that you havea
problem. You should take your vehicle in for service soon.
Glow Plugs Light
The orange Glow
Plugs light, if you
have one, is located
near the upper right
corner of the
instrument cluster.
If you have a diesel engine, it has a special starting system. An instrument
panel Glow Plugs light tells you when the engine is ready to be started. For
more details, see “Starting Your Diesel Engine” in the Index.
2-69
Low Coolant Warning Light
The orange Low
Coolant Warning
light, if you have one,
is located in the upper
left corner of the
instrument cluster.
If you have a diesel engine, you have a low coolant light. If this light comes
on anytime the engine is running, your system is lowon coolant and the
engine may overheat. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index and have your
vehicle serviced as soon as you can.
Charging System Warning Light
The red Charging
System Warning light
is located at the upper
right corner of the
instrument cluster.
The Charging System Warning light shouldcome on briefly when you turn
on the ignition, before starting the engine, as a check to show you it is
working. After the engine starts, the light shouldgo out. If it stays on or
comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with your
charging system. It could indicate a problem with the alternator drive belt,
or some other charging system problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light ison could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light on, it helps to turn off all
your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
2-70
Malfunction Indicator (Service Engine
Soon) Lamp
ENGINE
N
The orange
Malfunction Indicator
(Service Engine Soon)
Lamp islocated at the
middle right edge of
your instrument
cluster.
A computer monitors the operation of your fuel, ignition and emission
control systems. This light should come on when theignition is on but the
engine is not running, as a check to show you its working. If it does not
come on at all, haveit fixed right away. If it stays on, or comes on while you
are driving, the computer is indicating that you have a problem. You should
take your vehicle in for service soon.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after
a while
the emission controls won’t work as well, your fuel economy
won’t be as good, and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
Check Gages Light
The orange Check
Gages light is located
near the lower right
corner of the
instrument cluster.
2-71
This light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine. If the light
comes on and stays on while you are driving, it could indicate a problem
with your vehicle. It could be a problem with your oil pressure, coolant
temperature, or some other problem. Checkyour various gages to see if they
are in the warning zones. If theyare, have your vehicle serviced right away.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Indicator Light
(Canada Only)
The green Daytime
Running Lights
(DRL) Indicator light,
if you have one,is
located near the upper
center of the
instrument cluster.
If your vehicle was first sold, when new, in Canada, you will have this green
light on the instrument panel. It will light whenever the Daytime
Running
Lights are on. For more details about DRL, see “Headlights and Vehicle
Lighting” in this section.
Shift Indicator Light
The orange SHIFT
Indicator light, if you
have one, is located
near the upper left
corner of the
instrument cluster.
This light, with the word SHIFT and the upshift arrow, is used on some
models with manual transmissions. Dependingon your particular model,
your vehicle may not havethis light. The SHIFT indicator light will help
you get the best fuel economy.See “Shift Light” or “Shift SpeedsVehicles Without Shift Light” in this section for more information.
2-72
Listed are four situations you may experience with your fuel gage:
0
At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full.
0
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated.
For example, the gage may have indicated thetank was half full, but it
actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the
tank.
0
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up.
0
The gage doesn’t go
back to empty when you turn off the ignition.
None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage.
For information on how to fill your fuel tank, see “Fuel - Filling Your
Tank” in the Index.
For your fuel tank capacity, see “Fuel -Tank
Capacity” in the Index.
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gagepointer moves
into the red area, about 260°F (145°C) ormore, your engine is too hot! It
means that your engine coolanthas overheated. If you have been operating
your vehicle under normal operating conditions, you should pull off the
road, stop your vehicle, and turn off the engineas soon as possible.
Hot Coolant Can BurnYou Badly!‘
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to do. See “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
2-75
Oil Pressure Gage
Standard Cluster-Gas
Standard Cluster -Diesel
40
TachometerCluster -Gas
TachometerCluster-Diesel
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per
square inch) when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure in kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with engine speed,
outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the low pressure
zone indicate the normal operating range.
2-76
Headlight HighBeam Indicator Light
The blue Headlight
High Beam Indicator
light is located near
the middle left edge of
the instrument cluster.
The high beam indicator is on whenever you use your high beam headlights.
For more details about high beams, see “Headlight High-Low Beam”
earlier in this section.
Turn Signal and Lane Change lndicator Lights
The greenTurn Signal
and Lane Change
Indicator lights are
located at the middle
left and right edges of
the instrument cluster.
(I
The signal indicator will come on whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. See “Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator” earlier in this section.
2-73
Gages
Fuel Gage
Standard Cluster -Gas
Standard Cluster -Diesel
TachometerCluster-GasTachometerCluster-Diesel
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about how much fuel you
have left in your tank. The gage will first indicate empty before you are out
of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.
2-74
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil
level or other problem causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as
possible.
I NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be
costly andis not covered by your warranty.
Voltmeter
Standard Cluster
Tachometer Cluster
14
When your engine is not running, but the ignition is on (in the RUN
Position), this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in DC volts. When
the engine is running, the gage shows the condition of the charging system.
Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical
system.
2-77
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone.
If you must drive, turn off all unnecessary accessories, and have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, as in a luggage carrier, care
should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.
Convenience Net
If you have a conveniencenet, it is stored in a pouch attached to the spare
tire.
2-78
Luggage Carrier (Option)
The luggagecarrier has slats and side rails attached to the roof, and cross
rails which can be moved fore and aft in the side rails to help secure cargo.
Tie the load to the side rails or siderail supports. Use the crossrails mostly
for foreand aft stops.
NOTICE:
Loading cargo that weighs more than 200 pounds (90.6 kg) on
the luggage carrier may damage your vehicle. When youcarry
large things, never let them hang over the rear orthe sides of
your vehicle. Load your cargo so that itrests on the slats and
does not scratch or damage the vehicle. Put the cargo against the
side rails and fasten it securely to theluggage carrier.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For
more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see“Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
To prevent damage orloss of cargo as you’re driving, check now and then to
make sure the luggagecarrier and cargo are still securely fastened.
Be sure the cargo properly
is
loaded.
0
If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, place the load in the area
over the rear wheels (behind the rear side door
on wagon models). If
you need to, cut a pieceof 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the cross rails
and side rails to spread theload. If plywood is used, tie it to the side rail
supports.
0
Tie the load to the crossrails or the side rail supports. Use the cross
rails only to keep the loadfrom sliding.
2-79
If you need to carry long items, move the cross rails as far apart as they
will go. Tie the load to the cross rails and the side railsor side rail
supports. Also tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load so tightly
that the cross rails or siderails are damaged.
After moving the cross rails, be sure to tighten all the slider screws.
Trailer Wiring Harness (Option)
An optional 7-wire
harness is stored under
your vehicle along the
rear frame
crossmember. The
harness has a 30 amp.
in-line fused battery
feed wire and no
connector, and should
be wired by a
qualified electrical
technician.
Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tape or strap it to your
vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave it loose enough so the wiring won‘t
bind or break when turning with the trailer, butnot so loose that it drags on
the ground.
Store the harness in its original position. Wrap the harness together and tie it
neatly so it won’t be damaged.
2-80
Step-Bumper Pad
If your vehicle has a rear step bumper, it may be equipped with a rear step
pad at thecenter of the bumper. Use this padto improve footing when you
are stepping on the bumper step.
If you will be using
the bumper to tow a
trailer, you must
remove the center
cutout circle to install
the trailer ball. You
must also remove both
outer cutouts to attach
the trailer safety
chains.
)c
@
p.';
2&&
2-81
"
To remove the pad, lift
the edge of the pad
from therear of the
bumper and swing it
forward. When the
pad releases from the
bumper holes, lift the
pad off.
Notes
2-82
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
Section
-
In this section you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control systems
and audio systems offered with your vehicle.Be sure toread about the
particular system supplied with your vehicle.
For explanation of vehicle symbols in this section, referto “Vehicle
Symbols” in the Introduction.
. . . ....
. . . . . . . . 3-2
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . ,
*
, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Electronic Heating/Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Flow-Through Ventilation System . . .
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Systems (Wagon Models) . . . . . 3-8
Rear Window Defogger
Audiosystems
,,
. .. . . . ........... .
. . . . . . . . . . 3-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
FM Stereo . . . . . . . . .
..................I...
...
. 3-12
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
AMStereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
How to Operate Your AM ETR@Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
How to Operate Your AM-FM Stereo Audio System and
Cassette Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . 3-14
How to Operate Your AM-FM Stereo Audio System and
Cassette Player with Graphic Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 8
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .
.
, , , ,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-1
Comfort Controls
Flow-Through Ventilation System
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies outsideair to the
inside of your vehicle when it ismoving.
I
With the side
windows closed, air
will flow into the front
I air inlet grilles,
through the vehicle
and out the rear air
exhaust valves.
F ”
Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or the air
conditioning fan is running, unless your optional air conditioner is in the
MAX mode. For more information see “MAX Button” in this section.
Ventilation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow, or any other
obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will work far
better, reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the blower fan to HI
for afew moments before driving off. This helps clear the intake ducts
of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of
your windows.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air to
circulate throughout your vehicle.
3-2
Air Vents
If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, there are air vents below the
instrument panel.
Use the handlesbelow
your steering wheel,
with the vent symbols
on them, to open and
close thevents.
* 2,,.' ;.!"'."
p*~$;mP$
%$
,i*
:'
"X;.,'.,
2
,.,
I
If your vehicle hasair
conditioning, you will
find air vents in the
center and on the sides
of your instrument
panel.
You can move the vents grilles from side to side or up and down to direct
the flowof air, or closethe vents altogether.
When you close avent, it will increase the flowof air coming out of any
vents that are open.
3-3
Heater Output
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, it is equipped with an engine coolant
heater. An engine coolant heater is optional on gas engine vehicles. You can
use an engine coolant heater during initial start-up in cold weather (20” F,
-8” C, or lower) to help heat thepassenger compartment faster. Because an
engine coolant heater warms theengine coolant, your vehicle’s heating
system can provide some heat as soon as you start the engine.
The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces the timeit takes for the
engine to reach normal operating temperature, andshortens the time it takes
the heater to reach full output. For more information, See “Engine Coolant
Heater” in the Index.
Diesel Engine
If you idle your diesel engine for a long time when it’s cold outside, your
heater may blow out cool air.This is normal. When you increase theengine
speed, your heater should blowout warmer air. Ifit doesn’t, your coolant
level may be low.See “Engine Coolant” in the Index to find out how to
check your coolant level.
Heating System (Without Air Conditioning)
If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, this is what your heating
system will look like.
3-4
Function Lever
The upper lever on the control panel can be moved to three different heating
functions.
0
Vent (Left): Air comes out at the vents on your instrument panel and at
your front side windows.
0
Heater (Center): Air comes out near the floor. This setting, along with
a heat setting, is best for cold weather.
0
Defrost (Right): This setting operates the defroster. Air comes out near
the bottom ofthe windshield and at your front side windows. Use this
setting, along with a heat setting, when you get fog or ice on the
windshield.
Placing the lever between positions sends air outboth vents.
Temperature Lever
The lower lever on the control panel lets you select the temperature of the
air flowing into the passenger area of your vehicle. Move the lever right
toward (+) for warmer air. Move the lever left toward (-) for cooler air.
Fan Control Knob
The knob on the right side of the heating system control panel controls the
fan speed. The knob has four speed positions. To increase the air flow, turn
the knob toward (+). To decrease the air flow, turnit toward (-).
Electronic Heating/AirConditioning System
If your vehicle has air conditioning, your heating/air conditioning system
will look like this.
3-5
When you first turn on your vehicle’s air conditioning, open the windows to
clear the vehicle of hot air. Using theMAX button can also help. See
“MAX Button” in this section for more information.
. ‘
‘ I
s
......
Lj”.
.
..-.
,OFF
.....
. . .
. .. . ... .
:
Function Display
Your system has a lighted display showing each system whenit is operating.
During normal operation, all the lights won’t come on at the same time.
Only the ones displaying the current settings will light.
Temperature SelectorBar
The bar under your system display lets
flowing into the passenger area of your
and press HOT for warmer air. Release
temperature you want. The temperature
arrow moving between C and H.
youselect the temperature of theair
vehicle. Press COLD for cooler air
the bar when the systemreaches the
is shown on the display by the
Air Controls ( 8 LEND)
The twobuttons to the right of the system display control theair flow. You
can blend the air flow to suit your needs.The amount of blending is shown
on the display by an arrow moving between the figure’sfeet (floor air flow)
and head (ventair flow).
Left Button
Vent (Top) : Press the top of this button and the air flow will come through
the instrument panel vents.
Heater (Bottom) : Press the bottom of this button and the air flow will
come through the floor outlet.
3-6
The air flow can be blended between the two positions. To blend between
positions pressthe side of the buttonshowing the area where you would like
more air flow. The system will automatically begin to blend toward the
position chosen.To stop the system between positions, just press the SAME
side of the button again.
Right Button
Defrost (Top) : This setting operates the defroster. Air comes out near the
bottom of the windshield and at your front side windows. Use this setting,
along with a heat setting, when you get fog orice on the windshield.
Heater (Bottom) : Press thebottom of this button and air comes out near
the floor. This setting, along with a heat setting, is best for passenger
comfort in cold weather.
The airflow can be blended between the two positions. To blend between
positions press theside of the button showing the area where you would like
more air flow. The system will automatically begin to blend toward the
position chosen. To stop thesystem between positions, just press the SAME
side of the button again.
A/C Button
Press the button marked A/C to turn your air conditioner on and off. The
A/C symbol will light on your display and air will come out of your
instrument panel vents. The fan will automatically be set on LOW .
When you press the A/C button to turn the air conditioner off, the system
will operate in the vent mode. When you turn the air conditioner back on,
the system will operate in the mode that you last selected unless the OFF
button was pressed.
MAX Button
If you press theMAX button, the air in your vehicle will be recirculated.
With the air conditioner on, MAX will give you maximum cooling.It can
also be used in all modes to help keep dust outof your vehicle. When MAX
is selected, REC will light on your display.
If your air conditioner developshigh system pressure, it will automatically
go into theMAX mode and REC will light on your display. The A/C
system will remain in the MAX mode, even if you press the MAX button,
until system pressure returns to a normal level.
3-7
Fan ControlButton
This button is in the upper right corner of your system control panel.The
fan has four settings - low, medium low, medium high and high.
Press the
top of the button (+) to increase the air flow.Press the bottom of the button
(-) to decrease the air flow. The setting you select is shown on your display
as LOW, MED LOW, MED HI or HI.
OFF Button
Press this button to turn the air conditioningheating system off. Pressing
OFF will erase the present mode of operation from the system’s memory,
Outside air will still comeout of the heater outlet whenever the vehicleis
moving forward.
If the OFF button was pressed,you must press A/C, MAX, or one of the
BLEND buttons for the system to come back on.
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Systems
(Wagon
Models)
If your vehicle has eitheror both of these systems, you can increase and
decrease the air flow at the rear vents. Depending
on the system you have
and the setting selected, you can send
cooled or heated air to the rearof the
vehicle.
Rear Air Conditioning (Without Rear Heater)
If your vehicle has rear air conditioning (without rear heater), the controls
are located above the front and second seats.The front and rear overhead
controls let you increase and decrease the air flow at the rear vents.
ntrolRearControl
Front
e
t
F
3-8
To operate the rear air conditioning system, thefront air conditioning
system must be on. With the front air conditioning system off, the rear
system controls can be used to circulate air in the rear of the vehicle.
To operate the rear system using the front control, justturn the knob to the
blower positionyou want.
To use the rear control, firstturn the front control knob to REAR CNTL.
Then, the rear control can be used to increase and decrease the air flow.
Rear Heater (WithoutRear Air Conditioning)
If you have a rear
heater (without rear
air conditioning), the
control switch is
located on the
instrument panel.
To increase and decrease the flow of heated air to the rear floor vents, move
the switch with the fan symbol on it to the blower speed you want.
Move the switch all the way to the left position to turn the rear blower off,
and each position to the right increases the flow of heated air.
Move the switch all the way to the right position to turn the blower on high,
providing maximum flow of heated air.
3-9
Rear Air Conditioning and Rear
Heater
If your vehicle has a rear air conditioning and rear heater system
combination, controls are provided to regulate the temperature, location and
speed of the air flow.
Front Control
Rear Control
1
To adjust the air temperature, turn the temperature knob on the right side of
the controlpanel. For warmer air, turn the knob to the right (red) side, and
for cooler air, turn the knob to the left (blue) side.
To regulate the air flow location, adjust the center knob on the control panel.
Turn the knob toward the left for tloor vent air flow or toward the right for
headliner vent air flow. Generally, the upper vents are used for air
conditioning and the floor vents for heating: However, the control knob may
be set to allow any desired blend of air flow.
'
To adjust the air flow speed, turn the fan control knob on the left side of the
control panel to the desired blower setting.
To activate the rear control, move the fan knob on the front control to
REAR CNTL. This will allow second seat passengers to adjust the controls
as they desire.
3- 10
Rear Window Defogger
You can tell if your vehicle has this option by looking at the rear window. If
you see lines running across the glass, you have it. These arethe wire-like
elements which heat your window.
1 NOTICE:
Scraping the insideof your rear window couldcut and damage
the defogger. Your warranty wouldnot cover this damage. And,
don't put decals there,you might have to scrape them
off.
For best results, clear the window of as much snow or ice as possible first.
To turn on the rear
window defogger, find
the switch marked
REAR DEFOGon
your instrument panel,
just below the heater
system.
Press the right side of the switch, with the defog symbol on it, until the light
in the switch comes on, then release it.
The rear window defogger will only work if the ignition switch is turned to
RUN.
You can turn the defogger off at any time bypressing the left, lighted side of
the switch. The defogger will shut itself off after several minutes, so that the
glass does not get too hot. If the defogger shuts off, and the window still
isn't clear, turn the defogger on again.
3-11
A udia Systems
Your Delco@audio system has been designedto operate easily and give
years of listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you
acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco@system can do
and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the mostout of
the advanced engineering that wentinto it.
Be aware that hearing damage from loud noiseis almost undetectable until
it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes ofsound. Sound that
seems normal can be loud and harmfulto your hearing. Take precautionsby
adjusting the volume control on your radioto a safe sound level beforeyour
hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing lossor damage:
0
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
0
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound. ButFM signals can only reach
about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). And, tall buildings or hills can interfere
with FM signals, causing the soundto come and go.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night.
The longer range, however, cancause stations to interfere with each other.
AM can pick up noise from things like electrical storms and power lines.If
the noise interferes with your listening, try reducing the treble to lessen the
noise.
AM Stereo
This means the Delco@system can receiveC-QUAM@ stereo broadcasts.
Many AM stations around the countryuse C-QUAM@ to produce stereo,
though some do not. If your Delco@system can get C-QUAM@, your
“STEREO” light will come on when you’re receiving it. (C-QUAM@ is a
registered trademark of Motorola, Inc.).
3-12
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle -like a
tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two-way radio - be
sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s veryimportant
to do it properly. Addedsound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delco@
radio or other
systems, and even damage them. And,your vehicle’s systems
may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has
been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check withyour dealer and
be sure to check Federal rules covering mobileradio and
telephone units.
How to Operate Your AM ETR Radio
To Play the Radio
Press the PWR-VOL-TONE knob to switch the radio on and off. This
knob does two other things:
It controls the volume. Rotate the VOL knob clockwise to increases the
volume.
The knob behind the PWR-VOL knob is the TONE knob. Rotate this
knob clockwise for more treble and counterclockwise for more bass.
3-13
TUNE Button
Press the side of the button with the down arrow
to decrease the radio
station frequency or the side of the button with the up arrow to increase the
radio station frequency.
Pushbuttons
The fivepushbuttons let you return to favorite stations. Just:
Tune in the station you want.
Press the SET button. (SET appears in the electronic display for a few
seconds).
Within 5 seconds, press one of the five pushbuttons to store the station.
Whenever you press that button, the preset station will return.
How to Operate Your AM-FM Stereo Audio System
and Cassette Deck
To Play The Radio
Press the amber PWR button to switch the radio on and off.
RCL Button
When the ignition is off, press the RCL button to display the time. With the
ignition in RUN or ACC, press RCL to recall the radio station frequency
and volume setting when the time display is showing. After a few seconds,
the readout will return to the time display.
3-14
SEEK Button
Press the SEEK button to make the receiver seek, and stop at, the next
higher available station.
SCAN Button
Press the SCAN button to make the receiver scan, and momentarily pause
at, all available stations. SCAN will appear in the electronic display while
the receiver is in the scan mode. Press SCAN again to cancel the scan mode
and hold the current station.
AM-FM Button
Press the AM-FM button to switch between AM and FM.
VOL Button
The VOL button controls the volume. Pressing VOL "+" increases volume;
VOL "-"decreases volume.
TUNE Button
To tune in radio stations, press the TUNE button. TUNE "+" increases
radio station frequency; TUNE "-"decreases radio station frequency.
BASS Button
Press the BASS button to adjust the bass level. BASS "+" increases the
bass; BASS "-"decreases bass.
Adjust the TREB and BASS buttons to give a pleasing sound. If a station is
weak and noisy, adjust the TREB button to reduce the noise.
TREBLE Button
Press the TREB button to adjust the treble level. TREB "+" increases the
treble; TREB "-"decreases treble.
BAUFADE Buttons
To balance and fade the sound between the lefvright or fronthearspeakers,
use the four buttons with the speaker symbols on them. Press the left and
right buttons to adjust the left and right speaker balance. Pressing the top
and bottom buttons adjusts the front and rear speaker volume balance, or
fade. The relative balance and fade adjustments are shown on the electronic
display.
3- 15
Pushbuttons
The six pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations.You can set the
pushbuttons for up to twelve favorite stations (6 AM and 6 FM). To set the
pushbuttons, just:
Tune in the station you want.
Press the SET button. (SET appears in the electronic display for a few
seconds.)
0
Within 5 seconds, push one of the six pushbuttons to store the station.
After that, whenever you press that button, the preset station will
re turn.
Clock
To set the clock,just:
a Press the SET button. The word SET will light up in the electronic
display.
0
Within 5 seconds, press and holdthe SEEK button until the correct
hour appears on the display.
Then, press and hold the SCAN button until the correct minute appears
on the display.
After you set the time, the word SET will remain in the electronic
display for a few seconds.
.
..,
... ..
,
.... ,
-.
.... .
If you have a cassette deck, it is built to work best with tapes thatare 30 to
45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than thatare so thin that they
may not work will in this player.
3-16
Press the PWR button on the radioto turn the system on. The radio will
play until a cassette is pushed into the cassette entry door (the tape side goes
in first.)
Once the tape is playing, use the radio control buttons for volume, tone,
balance and fade, justas you do for theradio. The arrowson the player
indicate which side of the tapeis being played.
PROG
To go from one sideof the tape to the other, press the PROG button.
Observe the lighted arrows to determine which side of the tape is being
played.
If a tape is inserted with side “1” (or “A”) up, then the up arrow means that
that side is being played. Likewise, adown arrow would indicate that side
“2” (or “B”)had been selected. The player will automatically switch to the
other side of the tape when the first side ends.
REV
To rapidly rewind the tape, press the REV button. The tape will rapidly
rewind until you press either the PROG or EJCT button. If the beginning
of the tape is reached while in the REV mode, play will resume on the same
side of the tape.
FWD
To rapidly advance the tape, press the FWD button. The tape will rapidly
advance until you press either the PROG or EJCT button. If the end of the
tape is reached while in the FWD mode, the tape will change direction, and
play will resume on the opposite sideof the tape.
EJCT
Press the EJCT button to eject the cassette tape from the player (the radio
will then play).
3-17
How to Operate Your AM-FM Stereo Audio System
and Cassette Deck with Equalizer
To Play The Radio
Press the amber PWR button to switch theradio on and off.
RCL Button
When the ignition is off, press theRCL button to display the time. With the
ignition in RUN or ACC, press RCL to recall the radio station frequency
and volume setting when the time display is showing. After a few seconds,
the readout will return to thetime display.
SEEK Button
Press the SEEK button to make the receiver seek, and stop at, the next
higher available station.
SCAN Button
Press the SCAN button to make the receiver scan, and momentarily pause
at, all available stations. SCAN will appear in the electronic display while
the receiver is inthe scan mode. PressSCAN again to cancel the scan mode
and hold thecurrent station.
AM-FM Button
Press the AM-FM button to switch betweenAM and FM.
3- 18
Stereo (AM)
Your Delco@radio can receive C-QUAM@stereo broadcasts. Many AM
stations around the country use C-QUAM@to produce stereo, though some
do not. If your Delco@system can get C-QUAM@ signals, your
“STEREO” light will come on when you are receiving stereo. (C-QUAM@
is a registered trademark of Motorola Inc.).
VOL Button
The VOL button controls the volume. Pressing VOL “+.I’ increases volume;
VOL “-” decreases volume.
TUNE Button
To tune in radio stations, press the TUNE button. TUNE “+” increases
radio station frequency; TUNE “-’, decreases radiostation frequency.
BAUFADE Buttons
To balance and fade thesound between the lefthight or fronthear speakers,
use the four buttonswith the speakersymbols on them. Press the left and
right buttons to adjust the left and right speaker balance. Pressingthe top
and bottom buttons adjusts the front and rear speaker volume balance, or
fade. The relative balance and fade adjustmentsare shown on the electronic
display.
Pushbuttons
The six pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations. You can set the
pushbuttons for up to twelve favorite stations (6 AM and 6 FM). To set the
pushbuttons, just:
Tune in the station you want.
Press the SET button. (SET appears in the electronic display for a few
seconds.)
0
Within 5 seconds, push one of the six pushbuttons to store the station.
After that, whenever you press that button, the preset station will
return.
Clock
To set the clock, just:
Press the SET button. The word SET will light up in the electronic
display.
Within 5 seconds, press and hold the SEEK button until the correct
hour appears on the display.
3-19
Then, press and hold the SCAN button until the correct minute appears
on the display.
After you set the time, the word SET will remain in the electronic
display for a few seconds.
Cassette Deck with Graphic
Equalizer
If you have a cassette deck, it is built to work best with tapes thatare 30 to
45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin that they
may not work well inthis player.
Press the PWR button on theradio to turn the system on. The radio will
play until a cassette is pushed into the cassette entry door (the tape side goes
in first.)
Once the tape is playing, use the radio controlbuttons for volume, balance
and fade, just as you do for the radio. The arrows on the player indicate
which side of the tape is being played.
Graphic Equalizer
The graphic equalizer lets you fine tune bass, mid-range and treble
frequencies to your individual taste. The unit has five separate adjustable
frequency ranges.
To emphasize a frequency, press the top of the button“+” and to
de-emphasize a frequency, press the bottomof the button “-.” It’s best to
begin with all thecontrols in the middle position, then adjust each control as
you like. Observe the electronic display for relative frequency emphasis.
3-20
0 0 2 Button
For better sound when playing high biaschrome ormetal tapes, press the
Cr02 button. The light in the button will be on while the player
is in the
Cr02 mode. When playing standard tapes, you will get better sound while
in the standard mode. If the Cr02 button is lit, press it to return the player
to standard mode (the light will go out).
PROG Button
To go from one side of the tape to the other, pressthe PROG button.
Observe the lighted arrows to determine which side of the tape is being
played.
If a tape is inserted with side “1” (or “A’) up, then theup arrow means that
that side is being played. Likewise, a down arrow wouldindicate that side
“2” (or “B”) had been selected. The player will automatically switch to the
other side of the tape when thefirst side ends.
EJECT Button
Press the EJECT button to eject the cassette tape from the player (the radio
will then play.)
TAPE
The up arrow and down arrow, below the word TAPE on the cassette deck,
let you know which side of the tape is currently playing. For more
information, see PROG in this section.
FWD Button
To rapidly advance the tape, press theFWD button. The light in the button
will be lit and the tape will rapidlyadvance until you press the PROG
button or press the FWD button again. If the end of the tape is reached
while in theF”D mode, the tape will change direction, and play will
resume on the opposite side of the tape.
SEEK Button
To search for the next selection on the tape, press the SEEK button. The
light in the SEEK button will belit and the player willseek the beginning
of the next selection. For the seek mode to stop at the next selection,there
must be atleast a 4-second gap between selections on the tape.
REV Button
To rapidly rewind the tape, press the REV button. The light in the button
will be lit and the tape will rapidly rewind until you press thePROG button
or press the REV button again. If the beginning ofthe tape is reached while
in the REV mode, play will resume on the same side of the tape.
3 -23
REPT Butfon
Press the REPT button to repeat the currently playing selection on the tape.
For the REPT mode to repeat a selection, there must be at least a 4-second
gap between selections on the tape.
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can result in reduced sound
quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged player mechanism. Cassette tapes
should be stored in their plasticcases away from contaminants, direct
sunlight, and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may notoperate properly or
cause failure of the tape player.
As regular maintenance, your tape player should be cleaned each month
or
after every 15 hours of use. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault.If this
other cassette has no improvement in sound quality,clean the tape player.
Clean your tape player
with a wiping-action,
non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, and follow
the directions
provided with it.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality maydegrade over time.
Always make sure that the cassette tape is ingood condition before you
have your tape player serviced.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being
damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, you can straightenit
out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the
fender.
3-22
Your Driving and the Road
Section
1
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in
varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on
driving.
Defensive Driving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Control of a Vehicle
Braking . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Steering Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Off-RoadRecovery
LossofControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Off-Road Driving With Your Four-wheel Drive Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Driving in the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
DrivingatNight
CityDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Freeway Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
.................................... 4-29
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Powerwinches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4-34
PowerTake-Off(PT0) .....................................
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
.
Hill and Mountain Roads
4-1
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safetydevice in your vehicle: Buckle up.
(See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be readyfor anything.” On city streets,
rural roads, or freeways, it means “always expectthe unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventableof accidents. Yet they
are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive
driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving.You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is goingto brake or turn suddenly.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy.
It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year. Alcohol takes away three things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths
involve alcohol - a driver, apassenger or someone else, such as a
pedestrian, had been drinking. In most cases,these deaths are the result of
someone who was drinking anddriving. About 20,000 motor
vehicle-related deaths occur each year because of alcohol,and thousands of
people are injured.
Just how much alcohol istoo much if a person plans todrive? Ideally, no
one should drink alcohol and then drive. But if one does, then what’s “too
much”? It can be alot less than many might think. Althoughit depends on
each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Content (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends
upon four things:
0
How much alcohol is in the drink.
0
The drinker’s body weight.
The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking.
The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol.
4-2
According to the American Medical Association, a 180-pound (82 kg)
person who drinks three 12-ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will
end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same
BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml)glasses of wine or three mixed
drinks if each had 1-112 ounces (45 ml) ofya liquor like whiskey, gin or
vodka.
~~
~
It's the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person
drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an
hour, the person'sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes foodjust before or during drinkingwill have aslightly lower
BAC level.
3 HOUU§
2 HOURS
1 HOUR
The law in most U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BACof 0.10 percent. In
Canada thelimit is 0.08 percent, and in some other countries it's
lower than
that. The BACwill be over0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one
hour). Of course, as we'veseen, it dependson how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly theperson drinks them.
4-3
But it’s veryimportant to keep in mind that the abilityto drive is affected
well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and thatthe
effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in an accident
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A
driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent (three beers in one hour for a
180-pound or 82 kg person) hasdoubled his or her chance of having an
accident. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of that driver having
an accident is six times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chances are
twenty-five times greater! And, the body takes about anhour to rid itself of
the alcohol inone drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers
will speed that up.
“I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer.What if there’s an emergency, aneed
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with a
higher BAC might not beable to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that many people don’t
know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system canmake
crash injuries worse. That’s especially true for brain, spinal cord and heart
injuries. That means that ifanyone who has been drinking - driver or
passenger - is in a crash, the chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher thanif that person had not been drinking. And we’ve
already seen that the chance of a crash itself is higherfor drinking drivers.
Control ofa Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go.
They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All threesystems have
to do their work at the places wherethe tires meet the road.
4-4
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easyto ask more of
those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you
can lose control of your vehicle.
Braking
Brakmg action involves perception time and reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That’sperception. time.
Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 314 of a second. But that’sonly an average. It
might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more
with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph ( 100 k d h ) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency,so keeping enough space
between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly withthe surface of the
road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition ofthe road (wet, dry,
icy); tire tread; and the condition of your brakes.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts - heavy
acceleration followed by heavy braking- rather than keepingpace with
traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy
braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better
braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t
pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If
your engine stops, you will stillhave some power brake assist. But you will
use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer
to stop and the brake pedal will be harderto push.
4-5
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has an advanced electronic braking system that can helpyou
keep it under control. When you start your vehicle and beginto drive away,
you may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise. This is the ABS system
testing itself.
..>
Here's how anti-lock works. Let's say the road is wet. You're driving safely.
Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here's what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowingdown. If one of the wheels is
about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each
front wheel and at the rear wheels.The anti-lock system can change the
brake pressure faster than any drivercould. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and roadconditions. You can steer around
the obstacle while braking hard.
.
...
'.." *!
As you brake, yourcomputer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and
controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-6
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change thetime you need to get your foot up
to the brake pedal. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you
won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or
stops. Always leave enough roomup ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
To Use Four-wheel Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down and let anti-lock
work for you. You may feel the brakesvibrate, or you may notice some
noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
Use your anti-lock braking system when you need to. With anti-lock, you
can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can
help you more than even the very best braking.
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops orthe system is
not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driverlost control’’accidents mentioned on the news happen
on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver orbeginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of
physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against theroad
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in
the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll
understand this.
The traction you can getin a curve dependson the conditionof your tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you’rein a curve,speed is the one factor you can control.
,
-
Suppose you’resteering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly
accelerate. Both control systems- steering and acceleration -have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration
can demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
4-7
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal,
steer the vehicle the wayyou want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of
course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you’ll wantto go slower.
If you need to reduce your speedas you approach acurve, do it before you
enter the curve, while yourfront wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Waitto accelerate until youare out of the curve,
and then accelerate gentlyinto the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For
in your lane, or a car
example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped
suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by
braking - if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou can’t; there isn’t
room. That’s the time forevasive action - steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very wellin emergencies like these. First apply
your brakes. It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem,to the left or right depending on
the space available.
you
An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision. If
are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock
positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, andjust as quickly
straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situationsare always possible isii good reason
to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-8
Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometime that your right wheels have dropped off the edgeof
a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery
should be fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in
the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheel up to 114 turn until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel go
to straight down the
roadway.
I
1 . Edge of Road
Surface
2. Slow Down
3. Left Approx.
Quarter Turn
4. Recover
Passing
The driverof a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits
for justthe right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing anothervehicle on a two-lane highway is a
potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies thesame
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the
passing driver faceto face with the worst of all traffic accidents -the
head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.”Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads for
situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successfulpass, wait for abetter time.
4-9
0
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a
sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your
pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road aheadis clear). Never cross a solid lineon your
side of the lane ora double solid line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
0
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re
awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t haveadequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly
slows or stops. Keep back a reasonabledistance.
0
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but
stay in the rightlane and don’t get too close. Time your moveso you
will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane.
If the way is clear to pass, you willhave a “running start” thatmore
than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And
if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only
slow down anddrop back again and waitfor another opportunity.
0
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But
take carethat someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass
the slow vehicle. Rememberto glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
0
Check your mirrors ,glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane
change signal before moving out of the right laneto pass. When you
are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to
see its front in your inside
mirror, activate your rightlane change signal and move backinto the
right lane. (Remember that if your right outside mirroris convex, the
vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it
really is.)
a Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads.
Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.
a Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even thoughthe
brake lights are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
0
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get
ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review whatdriving experts say about what happens when the three
control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’tgive up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an
escape route or area of less danger.
4-10
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable caresuited to existing conditions, and by
not “overdriving” thoseconditions. But skidsare always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems.
In the braking skid your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering
skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose
cornering force.And in the acceleration skidtoo much throttle causes the
driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid arebest handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and
quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering
quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material
is on the road. For safety,you’ll want to slow down and adjust your drivingto
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control morelimited.
While drivingon a surfacewith reduced traction, try your best to avoid
sudden steering, acceleration, or braking (including enginebraking by
shifting to a lower gear).Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues -such as enough water, ice or packed
snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface” - and slow down whenyou
have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock braking system (ABS) helps avoid only the
braking skid.
Driving Guidelines
This multipurpose passenger vehicleis defined as a utility vehicle in
Consumer Information Regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA)of the United States Department of
Transportation. Utility vehicles have higher groundclearance and a narrower
track to make themcapable of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary cars.An advantage of the higher groundclearance is a
better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems. They arenot
designed for cornering at the same speedsas conventional 2-wheel drive
vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
4-11
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four- Wheel Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel drive.
Also, see “Anti-lock Brakes” in the Index.
If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you shouldn’t drive off-road
unless you’re on a level, solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have some definite hazards.
The greatest of these is the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North American roadsystem
behind. Traffic lanes aren’t marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill. In short,
you’ve goneright back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s why it’s very
important that you read thisguide. You’ll find many driving tips and
suggestions. Thesewill help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are somethings to do before you go out. For example, be sure to have
all necessary maintenance and service work done. Be sure you read all the
information about your four-wheel drive vehicle in this manual. Is there
enough fuel?Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where
they should be? What are the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you’ll be driving? If you don’t know, you should check with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If
so, be sure toget the necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about how to load your
vehicle.
The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your
rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward as you can.
Be sure theload is secured properly, so driving on the off-road terrain
doesn’t toss things around.
4-12
You’ll find other important information in this manual. See “Vehicle
Loading,’’ “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires” in the Index.
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially whengoing to a remote area.
Know the terrain and plan your route. You are much less likely to get bad
surprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Tryto learn of any
blocked or closed roads.
It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle. If something
happens to one of them, the other can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read the winch
instructions. In a remote area, a winchcan be handy if you get stuck. But
you’ll want to know how to use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good ideato practice in an area that’s safe and close to home before
you go into the wilderness. Off-road driving does require some new and
different driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes, for example, need
to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to
listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands, feet, and
body you’ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
4-13
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving. One of
the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some
things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:
you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for
obstacles.
you have less time to react.
0
you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles.
0
you'll need more distance forbraking, especially since you're on an
unpaved surface.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain. You
need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features. Here are
some things to consider.
Surface Conditions. Off-roading can take you over hard-packed dirt,
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects
the steering, acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different ways.
Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience
slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and
longer braking distances.
Surface Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. A rock,
log, hole, rut, or bump can startle you if you're not prepared for them. Often
these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of
the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:
Is the path ahead clear?
0
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
0
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?(There's more discussion
of these subjects later.)
Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly?
When you drive over obstaclesor rough terrain, keep a firm grip on the
steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface features can jerk the wheel
out of your hands if you're not prepared.
4- 14
When you drive overbumps, rocks, or other obstacles, your wheels can
leave the ground. If this happens, even with one ortwo wheels, you can’t
control the vehicle as well or atall.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s especially important to
avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns, or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving
on paved roads and highways. There are no road signs, posted speed limits
or signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe
and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road. And this is
certainly true for off-road driving. At the very time you need special
alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious - or
even fatal - accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has
been drinking. (See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.)
Driving OnOff-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a hill. Driving safely
on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle
can and can’t do. There are some hills that simply can’t be driven, no matter
how well built the vehicle.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one of those hills that’s
just too steep to climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can behard to judge.
On a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant incline
with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way
to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top,
but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes,
grass, or shrubs.
4-15
Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill.
Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places?
0
Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface causetire
slipping?
Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won’t have to make
turning maneuvers?
Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path (boulders,
trees, logs or ruts)?
What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment, a drop-off, a
fence? Get out and walk the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way
to find out.
Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have ruts, gullies, troughs
and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of
erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you need to take some
special steps.
Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel.
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. Don’t use
more power than you need, because you don’t want your wheelsto start
spinning or sliding.
Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If the path twists and
turns, you might want to find another route.
Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill.
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching
traffic on trails or hills.
4-16
0
Sound thehorn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing
traffic know you’re there.
Use your headlights even during the
day. They make you more visible
to oncoming traffic.
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, andI
can’t make itup the hill?
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should do, and there are
some thingsyou must not do. First, here’s what youshould do:
Push the brakepedal to stop the vehicleand keep it fromrolling
backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.
If your engine is still running, shift the transmission into reverse,
release the parking brake,and slowly back down the hill in reverse.
If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to restart it. With the
brake pedal depressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the
transmission to “P” (Park) (or, shift to “ N ’ (Neutral) if your vehicle has
a manual transmission)and restart the engine. Then,shift to reverse,
release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as straight as
possible in reverse.
As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand on the steering
wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This way, you’ll be able to tell if your
wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you
back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or
right direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left orright will
increase thepossibility of a rollover.
Here aresome things you must not do if you stall, or are about to stall,
when going up a hill.
0
Never attemptto prevent a stall by shifting into “N” (Neutral) (or
depressing theclutch, if you have amanual transmission) to “rev-up”
the engineand regain forward momentum. This won’t work. Your
4- 17
vehicle will rollbackwards very quickly and you could go out of
control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then apply the
parking brake. Shift into reverse, release the parking brake, and slowly
back straight down.
Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a
hill. If the hill is steepenough to stall your vehicle, it’ssteep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up the
hill, you must back straight down thehill.
Q: Suppose, after
stalling,I try to back down the hill and decide
I just
can’t do it. What shouldI do?
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in “P” (Park) (or the
manual transmission in first gear),and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of
the path the vehicle would takeif it rolled downhill. Do not shift the
transfer case to “N” (Neutral) when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in
some gear.
Driving 50wnhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to consider a number of
things:
0
How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control?
What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? Hard-packed dirt?
Gravel?
0
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Boulders?
0
What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a
river bottom with largerocks?
4- 18
If you decide you can go down a hillsafely, then try to keep your vehicle
headed straight down, anduse a low gear. This way, engine drag canhelp
your brakes and they won’thave to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Q: Are there some thingsI should not do when drivingdown a hill?
A: Yes! These are important becauseif you ignore them you could lose
control and have aserious accident.
0
When driving downhill, avoidturns that take you across theincline of
the hill. A hill that’s not too steepto drive down may be too steepto
drive across. You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down.
0
Never go downhill with the transmission in “ N ’ (Neutral) , or with the
clutch pedal depressed in a manual
shift . This is called
“free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
Q: Am 1 likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if it happens going
downhill, here’s what to do.
Stop your vehicle by applying the regularbrakes. Apply the parking
brake.
Shift to “P,’ (Park) (or to Neutral with the manual transmission) and,
while still braking, restart the engine.
Shift back to alow gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight
down.
If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.
4- 19
Driving Across an lncline
Sooner orlater, an off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill.
If this happens, you have todecide whether to try todrive across the incline.
Here are some things to consider:
0
A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be toosteep to drive
across. When you go straight up or downa hill, the length of the wheel
base (the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the
likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when you drive
across an incline, the much more narrowtrack width (the distance
between the left and right wheels) may not prevent thevehicle from
tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an incline puts more
weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause adownhill slide or a
rollover.
Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill.
Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause your tires to
slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, itcan hit
something that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
0
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse. If
you drive across a rockwith the uphill wheels, or if the downhill
wheels drop into a rut or depression,your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive
across an incline. Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean
you have to drive it. Thelast vehicle to try it mighthave rolled over.
Q: What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not too
steep, but I hit
some loose gravel and start to slide downhill. What should
I do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This
should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping.
However, a much better way to prevent this is to get out and “walk the
course” so you know what the surface is like before you drive it.
4-20
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossingan incline, be sure you (and your
passengers) get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to
open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over,
you’ll be right in its path.
Driving In Mud, Sand, Snow, Or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels won’t get good traction.
You can’t accelerate as quickly, turning ismore difficult, and you’ll need
longer braking distances.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud - the deeperthe mud, the
lower thegear. In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving
so you don’t getstuck.
When you drive on sand,you’ll sense a changein wheel traction. But it will
depend upon how loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on
beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has an
effect on steering, accelerating, and braking. You may want to reduce the air
pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand. This will improve
traction.
4-21
Hard packed snow andice offer the worst tire traction. Onthese surfaces,
it’s very easy to lose control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor
that you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving, poor
steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control.
Driving In Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems. But heavy raincan
mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive throughit. If it’s deep
enough tocover your wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, don’t try it - you
probably won’t get through. Also, water thatdeep can damage your axle and
other vehicle parts.
If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly. At fast speeds, water
splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also
occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, aslong as your tailpipe is
under water, you’ll never beable to start your engine. When you go through
water, remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to
stop.
If you have a diesel engine, see “Driving Through Water (Diesel Engines)”
in the Index for more information on driving through water.
4-22
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody, chassis or
under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings cleaned and checked.
These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body
structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system for
damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off-road use. Refer
to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some
drivers are likely to be impaired -by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
Drive defensively.
0
Don't drink and drive.
0
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlights
behind you.
Since you can't see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more
space between you and other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlights can light
up only so much road ahead.
0
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you're tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.
4-23
Night Vision
No one can see as well at nightas in the daytime. But as we get older these
differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night asa 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example,
if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.
Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving,
don’t wear sunglasses at night.They may cut down on glare from
headlights, but theyalso make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching lights. It can take a second
or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlights), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching lights.
Keep your windshield and all theglass on your vehicle clean - inside and
on the glass. Even the inside
out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt
of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights
dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your
eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlights light up far less of a roadway when you are
in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out
dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlights should be checkedregularly
for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers
suffer from night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and aren’t
even aware of it.
Driving in the Rain
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road you can’tstop,
accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as
on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much treadleft, you’ll get even
4-24
less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to
fall while you are driving. The surfacemay get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for drivingon dry pavement.
The heavier therain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper
blades are in good shape, aheavy rain can makeit harder to see road signs
and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your
windshield washer tank filled. Replaceyour windshield wiper inserts when
they show signs of streaking ormissing areas on the windshield, or when
strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.
_:
,
1
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some
car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try
to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
4-25
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires
that they can actually ride on the water.This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you’re goingfast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,it
has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happenoften. But it can if your tires haven’tmuch
tread or if the pressure in oneor more is low. It can happenif a lot of water
is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface,there
could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just isn’t a hard and
fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down whenit is
raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Turn on ybur low-beam headlights - not just your parKing lights - to
help make you more visible to others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be
especially careful when youpass another vehicle. Allow yourself more
clear room ahead, and be preparedto have your view restricted byroad
spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.)
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets
is the amount of traffic on
them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay
attention to traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
4-26
e Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and
plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
e Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll
save time and energy. (See the next section, “Freeway Driving.”)
e Treat agreen light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because
the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just
before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared theintersection or may be running the red light.
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways,
turnpikes, or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their
own special rules.
The most important adviceon freeway driving is: Keep up withtraffic and
keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the otherdrivers are
driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have
a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try todetermine where you expect to blend
with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance overyour
shoulder asoften as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the
prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors, Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make
sure there isn’t another vehiclein your “blind” spot.
4-27
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable
following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in
advance. If you miss your exit do not, under any circumstances, stopand
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exitramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of
motion. After driving forany distance at higher speeds, you may tend to
think you are going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving ona Long Trip
Make sureyou’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start whenyou’re
not fresh - such asafter a day’s work- don’t plan to make too many
miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you
can easilydrive in.
Is your vehicle ready for along trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained,
it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it donebefore starting out. Of
course, you’ll find experienced and able service experts in vehicle
dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if
you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
0
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windowsclean
inside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
0
Fuel, Engine OiZ, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels?
0
Lights: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
0
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread
good enough for long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
0
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route?
Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-28
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is just
it plain
falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something aboutan easy stretch of road with the same scenery,
along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine,and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.
Then here are sometips:
0
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool
interior.
0
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check
your mirrors and your instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service, or parking area
and take a nap, get some exercise, orboth. For safety, treatdrowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountainsis different from driving in flat or
rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there,
here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. (See
“Off-Road Driving” in the Index for information about drivingoff-road.)
4-29
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the
brakes, tires, cooling system and transmission. These parts can work
hard on mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this:
let your engine dosome of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear
when you go down a steep or long hill.
0
Know how togo uphill. You may want to shift down toa lower gear.
The lowergears help cool your engine and transmission, and you can
climb thehill better.
0
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or
mountains. Don’t swing wide or cutacross the centerof the road. Drive
at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in
your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special
problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a
falling rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
i
4-30
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
0
Have your vehicle in good shape forwinter. Be sure your engine
coolant mix is correct.
0
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a smallbrush or broom, a supply of windshield
washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,
a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a smallbag of sand, a pieceof old
carpet or a couple
of burlap bags to help providetraction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in
your vehicle.
Driving on Snowor Ice
Most of the time, thoseplaces where your tires meet theroad probably have
good traction.
However, if there is snow or icebetween your tires and the road, you can
have avery slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip”and
will need to be very careful.
4-31
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be
slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even moretrouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get “wet ice” when it’s about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Trv to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing ,or loose snow drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish the surfaceunder the tires even
more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your ability to make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on drypavement. See
“Anti-lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot
that’s covered with ice. On anotherwise clear road, ice patches may
appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a
curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it.
Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
4-32
If You’re Caughtin a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You
should probably stay with your vehicle unless you knowfor sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do
to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: Turn on your
hazard flashers. Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve
been stopped by the snow. Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats - anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-33
Run your engineonly as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run
the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel forthe heat that you get and it keeps
the battery (or batteries) charged. You will need a well-charged battery (or
batteries) to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your
headlights. Let the heater run for awhile.
If you have a diesel engine, you may have to run it at a higher speed to get
enough heat. Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the
way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when
you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do itas little as possible.
Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
Power Winches
If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only use it when your
vehicle is stationary or anchored.
NOTICE:
When operating a power winch
on your vehicle, always leave the
transmission in“N” (Neutral). Leaving a automatic
transmission in “P”(Park) while using a power winch may
damage the transmission. Also, leaving a automatic or manual
transmission in gear while using an power winch may damage
the transmission.
Use the regular brakes, set the parking brake, or block the wheels to keep
your vehicle from rolling.
4-34
Power Take-Off (PTO)
NOTICE:
If you will be using thePTO while the vehicle remains in one
place, drive thevehicle to warm it up
before operating thePTO.
Don’t use the PTO for more than four hours without driving
your vehicle again. If you don’t follow these guidelines, your
transfer case or transmissioncould be damaged.
NOTICE:
Don’t have a PTO that will exceed 35 horsepower installed on
your vehicle. It could damage your transmission
or transfer
case.
Before using a power take-off, refer to the manufacturer’s or installer’s
instructions.
To engage a power take-off:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into “N” (Neutral).
3. Hold the clutch pedal down and engage the power take-off.
If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the transmission into the gear
you want. Then shift the transfer case into the range you want (if you
have four-wheel drive), apply the regular brakes andrelease the
parking brake.
4. Release the clutch (and the regular brakes) as you normally would.
When you release the clutch, the power take-off will start.
Using a Transfer CaseMounted Power Take-Off
(Manual Transmission)
I . Set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transfer case into “N” (Neutral).
3. Hold the clutch pedal down. If the vehicle will remain in the same
place, shift the transmission into the highest gear.
4-35
4. Engage the power take-off.
If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the transmissioninto the gear
you want. Then shift the transfercase into the range you want, apply
the regular brakes and release the parking brake.
5. Release the clutch (and the regular brakes) asyou normally would.
When you release the clutch, the power take-off will start.
Using a Transfer Case Mounted Power Take-Off
(Automatic Transmission)
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transfer case into “N” (Neutral).
3. Shift the transmission into “ N ’ (Neutral).
4. Engage the power take-off.
If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the transfercase into the
range you want. Then apply the regular brakes and release the parking
brake.
5. Shift the transmission to “D” (Drive) to start the power take-off.
6. Release the regular brakes to drive the vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
4-36
I NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result
in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer
correctly, follow the advice in this section, and see your
GM
dealer for important information about towing
a trailer with
your vehicle.
Every vehicle is ready for some trailer towing. If it was built with trailering
options, as many are, it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in
handling, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this section. In it are many time-tested, important
trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you
pull a trailer.
r f You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points.
There are many different laws having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be
driving. A good source forthis information can be state or provincial
police.
Consider using a sway control with a utility model if your trailer will
weigh 3,000 pounds (1 36 1 kg) or less, orwith a wagon model if your
trailer will weigh 4,000 pounds (1 800 kg) or less. You should always
use a sway control with a utility model if your trailer will weigh more
than 3,000 pounds ( I 361 kg), or with a wagon model if your trailer
will weigh more than 4,000 pounds (1 800 kg).
You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) your new
vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle orother parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t
drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
4-37
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude,
road grades, outside temperature andhow much your vehicle is usedto pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can
write us at the address listedin your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to General Motors of Canada Limited, Customer
Assistance Center, 1908 Colonel Sam Drive,Oshawa, Ontario L I H 8P7.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measure
because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The grossvehicle
weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may
if you will
carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And
tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to theGVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the
Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
A
B
If you’re using a “dead-weight” hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh
10% of the total loaded trailer weight(B). If you have a “weight-distributing”
hitch, the trailer tongue(A) should weigh 12% of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
4-38
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to
get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the limit for cold tires. You’ll find
these numbers on the Certification label at the rearedge of the driver’s door
or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the
GVW limit for your vehicle.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucKs
going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
If you use a step bumper hitch, and your trailer tongue has a V-shaped
foot, your bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Check the distance
from the front edge of the foot to the middle of the hitch ballsocket. If
the distance is less than 12 inches, take the foot off the trailer tongue.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer with a utility model that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 3,000 pounds (1 361 kg); or with a wagon model that,
when loaded, will weigh more than 4000 pounds (1 800 kg), be sure to
use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and sway control of
the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle
loading and good handling when you’re driving.
0
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO)from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see
“Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt and water can, too.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailerso that the tongue will
not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the
trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with
your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
4-39
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 pounds (450 kg) loaded, then it needs
its own brakes - and they mustbe adequate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Your trailer brake system cantap into your vehicle’s hydraulicbrake system,
but consider the following:
Will the trailer brake system use more than 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of
fluid from your vehicle’s mastercylinder? If it will, don’t tap intoyour
vehicle’s brake system. Both brakingsystems won’t work well, and you
could even lose your brakes altogether.
Will the trailer brake parts take 3,000 psi (20 650kPa) of pressure? If
not, the trailer brake system must notbe used with your vehicle.
If everything checks out this far, makethe brake tap at the port on the
master cylinder that sends the fluidto the rear brakes. But don’t usecopper
tubing for this. if you do, it will bend and finally breakoff. Use steel brake
tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself
with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicleyou are driving is now a good
deal longer and not nearly so responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform, safetychains,
electrical connector, lights, tiresand mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets
you check your electrical connection at thesame time.
4-40
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and
that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as farbehind the vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that
require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer.
And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the
trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guideyou.
4-41
Making Turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this
so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring, The green arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lights will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash
for turns even if the bulbs on thetrailer are burned out. Thus, you may think
drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your
no longer work well.
brakes so much that they would get hot and
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduceyour speed to around 45 mph
(70 k d h ) to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
If you have an automatic transmission, you should use “D” (or, as you need
to, a lower gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in “D” when
towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup andextend the life of your
transmission.
If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s better
not to use fifth gear. Just drive in fourth gear (or, as you need to, a lower
gear).
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, witha trailer attached, on a hill. If
something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can beinjured,
and both your vehicle and the trailercan be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how todo it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into “P’ (Park) yet, or in gear
for a manual transmission.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the
chocks absorb the load.
4-42
4. Re-apply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then
shift to “P” (Park), or “ R ’ (Reverse) for a manual transmission.
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear-not
in “N” (Neutral).
6. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking ona Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you:
Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
4-43
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See
the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil,axle lubricant, belt, cooling system, and brake
adjustment. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help
you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.
Trailer Light Wiring
See “Trailer Wiring Harness” in the Index.
4-44
Problems On The Road
Section
.
.
Here you’ll find what to do about someproblems that can occur on the road .
Hazard Warning Flasher
Other Warning Devices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Jumpstarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Engine Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
TowingYourVehicle
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Jackstorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
SpareTire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning
flashers let you warn
others. They also let
police know you have
a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal
lights will flash on
and off.
1
But they won’t flashif
you’re braking.
Press the button in to
make your front and
rear turn signals flash
on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your keyis in,
and even if the key isn’t in.
.
.
l o turn orr me
flashers, pull out on
the collar.
PP
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won’t work.
5-2
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to warn others. Set oneup
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery (or batteries) has run down, you may want to use another
vehicle and some jumper cables
to start your vehicle. But please follow the
steps below to do it safely.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result costly
in
damage to your
vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it could
damage yourvehicle, even if you have a manual transmission.
And if you have an automatic transmission, won’t
it
start that
way.
5-3
Tu Jump Start Your Vehicle;
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery witha negative
ground system.
I NOTICE:
I
If the other system isn’ta 12-volt system with a negative
ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
If you have a diesel engine vehicle with two batteries(or more), you
should know before you begin that, especially in cold weather, you may
not be able to get enough power from a single battery in another
vehicle to start your diesel engine.
If your vehicle has more thanone battery, use the battery that’son the
passenger side of the vehicle - this will reduce electricalresistance.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be
sure the vehicle’s aren’t touching each other.If they are, it could cause
a ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.
You could be injured ifthe vehicles roll. Set the parking brake firmly
on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in “P’ (Park) or a
manual transmission in “ N ’ (Neutral). If you have a four-wheel-drive
vehicle, be sure the transfer case isnot in “N” (Neutral).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off all lights that aren’t
needed, and radios. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries.
And it could save your radio!
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on,
it could be badly damaged. The
repairs wouldn’tbe covered by your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive (+) and
negative (-) terminals on each battery.
5-4
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If
they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should
know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) and negative (-) will go to
negative (-) or a metal engine part. Don’t connect (+) to (-) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too.
5-5
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
vehicle with the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+>terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Dead Battery(+)
Good Battery (+)
b
7. Don't let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+)
terminal of the good battery. Usea remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good battery's negative
(-) cable.
Don't let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end
of the negative cable doesn't go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy
unpainted metal part of the vehicle with the dead battery.
Heavy Metal Engine Part
Good Battery (-)
.: ..
I
5-6
9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as
good there, but thechance of sparks getting back to the battery is much
less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for
awhile.
1 1 . Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won't start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
Remove Cables in this Order
1. HeavyMetal
Engine Part
2. Good Battery (-)
3. GoodBattery (+)
4. Dead Battery (+)
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting.
Take care that they don't touch each other or any other metal.
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have your GM dealer or a professional towing service tow your
vehicle. They can provide the right equipment and know howto tow it
without damage.
If your vehicle has been changed since it was factory-new, by adding such
things like fog lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these things
could be damaged during towing.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle has rear-wheel drive, or that it has the four-wheel
drive option.
The make, model, and year of your vehicle.
5-7
0
Whether you can move the shift lever for the transmission and transfer
case, if you have one.
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key
off. The steering
wheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position, with a clamping
device designed for towing service, Do not use the vehicle’s steering
column lock for this. The transmission and transfer case, if you have one,
should be in Neutral andthe parking brake released.
5-8
Towing From the Front
If you have a two-wheel drive vehicle, don’t have your vehicle towed on
the rear wheels, unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the rear
wheels, don’t go more than 35 mph (56 km/h) or farther than 50 miles
(80 km) or your transmission will be damaged. If these limits must be
exceeded, then the rear wheels have to be supported on a dolly.
If your vehicle has the four-wheel drive option and the transfer case is
engaged, adolly must be used under the rear wheels when towing from the
front.
5-9
Towing From the Rear
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle instrument panel.
If you have a diesel engine, you will also find a low coolant light on your
instrument panel.
5-10
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
I NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no
coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be coveredby your warranty.
5-11
If No Steam Is Coming FromYour Engine
If you get the overheat warning butsee or hear no steam, the problem may
not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute
or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heaterto full hot at the highest fan speed and open the
window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to “ N ’ (Neutral).
If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to besafe,
drive slower for about ten minutes. If the warning doesn’tcome back on,
you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push the accelerator until theengine speed is
about twice as fast as normal idle speed. Bring the engine speed back to
normal idle speed after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops.
But then, if you still have the warning,TURN OFF THE ENGINE AND
GET EVERYONE OUT OF THE VEHICLE until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.
Cooling System-Gas Engines
When you decide it’s
safe to lift the hood,
here’s what you’ll see:
“ I
A. Coolant recovery
tank
B. Engine fan(s)
C. Radiator pressure
cap
5-12
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything
else until it cools down.
The coolant level
should be at or above
the COLD mark. If it
isn’t, you may have a
leak in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump
or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
P
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t
covered by your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See if the fan speed
increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down.
If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
5-13
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, butthe coolant level isn’t at or above
the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled)
and a proper antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant”
in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mix.)
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator,
Use the recommended coolant.
heater core and other parts.
5-14
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is ator above the COLD
mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You
can add the proper coolant mix directly to the radiator but be sure the
cooling system is cool before you do it.
”.
5-15
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system,
including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose,is no longer
hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly to the left until it first stops. (Don't press
down while turning the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is stillsome
pressure left.
2. Then keep
turning the
pressure cap, but
now push down
as you turn it.
Remove the
pressure cap.
5-16
3. Fill the radiator
with the proper
mix, up to the
base of the filler
neck.
4. Then fill the
coolant recovery
tank to the
COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back
on the coolant
recovery tank,
but leave the
radiator pressure
cap off.
5- 17
6. Start the engine
and let it run until
you can feel the
upper radiator
hose getting hot.
Watch out for the
engine fan(s).
By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neckmay be
lower. If the level is lower, add moreof the proper mix through the
filler neck until the level reaches the base ofthe filler neck.
8. Then replace the
pressure cap. At
any time during
this procedure if
coolant begins to
flow out of the
filler neck,
reinstall the
pressure cap. Be
sure the arrows
on pressure cap
line up like this.
Cooling System -Diesel Engines
When you decide it's
safe to lift the hood,
here's what you'll see:
A
A. Coolantsurge
tank pressure cap
B. Engine fan(s)
C . Radiator
5-18
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, don't do anything else
until it cools down.
The coolant level
should be at or above
the COLD mark. If it
isn't, you may have a
leak in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump
or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
NOTICE:
Engine damagefrom running your engine without coolant isn't
covered by your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engifieagain. See if the fan speed
increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down
If it doesn't, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
5-19
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at the COLD
mark add a 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and a proper
antifreeze at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,
including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap,is cool before you do it. (See
“Engine Coolant”in the Index for more information about the proper
coolant mix.)
5-20
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator,
So use the recommended coolant.
heater core and other parts.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no longer hot.
5-21
Turn the pressurecap slowly to the left untilit first stops. (Don't press
down while turning the pressurecap.)
If you hear a hiss, waitfor that to stop. A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
2. Thenkeep
turning the cap,
but now push
down as you turn
it. Remove the
pressure cap.
3. Open the air
bleed valve
located on the
thermostat
housing.
4. Fill the coolant
surge tank with
the proper mix,
up to the COLD
mark.
5-22
While filling the surge tank, watch to see
if coolant begins to stream out
the air bleed valve. When coolant beginsto stream out, close the valve.
5. With the air bleed
valve closed and
the coolant surge
tank pressure cap
off, start the
engine and let it
run until you can
feel the upper
radiator hose
getting hot.
Watch out forthe
engine fan( s).
6. By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be
lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mix to the coolant
surge tank until the level reaches the COLD mark.
7. Then replace the
pressure cap. Be
sure the arrows
on the pressure
cap line up like
this.
5-23
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling
fan. When the clutch is engaged,
the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In most every day
driving conditionsthe fan is spinning slower and clutch is not fully engaged.
This improvesfuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages. So you may hear an increase in
fan noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission
slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required
and the clutch partially disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine. It will go away
as the fan clutchpartially disengages.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you
maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much morelikely to
leak outslowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, then gently brake to a
stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve,acts much like a skid and may
require the same correction you’d use ina skid. In any rear blowout, remove
your foot fromthe accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and
noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop,well off the road if
possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next section shows how to use your jacking equipment
to change a flattire safely.
5-24
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoidfurther tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a
level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers.
The followingsteps
will tell you how to
use the jack and
change a tire.
The equipment you’ll need is located in the rear cargo area.You’ll also find
your spare tire there.
5-25
Spare Tire
Your spare tire is
mounted on the driver
side inside cargo area
wall, at therear of the
vehicle
First open the tire cover, if you haveone. Turn the wing nutto the left and
take it, and the adapter, off thebolt. Take the tireout of the vehicle and
remove the tire cover.
Jack and Tools-Utiliiy Models
I If
I
5-26
your utility model
has ajack cover, turn
the wing nutto the left
to take it off, then take
the cover off.
To take the jack out,
turn the wing nut to
the left and take it and
the retainer off. Take
the jack and storage
box out and then take
the tools out of the
box.
e
Your vehicle may have a pair of emergency gloves secured to the jack. You
can use them when changing the tire, or during other emergency situations.
Remember to replace them with the jack, so you will have them handy if
needed later.
Jack and Tools -Wagon Models
If your wagon model
has a jack cover, lift
the tab up to release
the cover. Slide your
hand under the edge
of the cover, swing the
cover open and then
take it off.
5-27
....... .....
...... .. ..
Your vehicle’s jack
and jacking tools are
stored in the
compartment. To take
the jack out, turn the
wing nut to the left
and take it and the
retainer off. Take the
jack and storage box
out and then take the
tools out of the box.
Your vehicle may have a pairof emergency gloves secured to the jack. You
can use them when changing the tire,or during other emergency situations.
Remember to replace them with thejack, so you will have them handyif
needed later.
Jacking Tool Storage -All Models
1. Socket
2. Jack Handle
3. Ratchet
4. Jacking Tool Storage Box
5. Jack Handle Extension
5-28
Jack Storage -Utility Models
34
5
1. Retainer
4. Jack Stbrage Box
2. Nut
5. Bracket.
3. Jack - Secure Jack in Vehicle as Shown
Jack Storage -Wagon Models
1 . Retainer
2. Nut
3. Jack - Secure Jack in Vehicle as Shown
5-29
4. Jack Storage Box
5. Bracket.
DOWN Marking
UP Marking
.:: . ,...." .....,.....,
'."I"' .?
,~
The ratchet has anUP and a DOWN marking.
5-30
. .,..,...
.. ..
i.....
(./
With the UP marking
on the ratchet facing
you, rotate the ratchet
to the right.
That will lift the jack head a little. Before raising the vehicle,do the
following things.
Put your spare tire near the flat tire.
Remove the wheel trim.
If there is a wheel
cover, pry along the
edge until it comes
off.
i
2’
Be careful; the rim edges may be sharp. Don’t try to remove it with your
bare hands.
5-31
If your vehicle has
wheel nut caps, use
the wheel wrench and
ratchet, with DOWN
facing you, to unscrew
and take themoff.
Then take the hub cap off.
If the wheel has a trim ring, remove it by using the flat end of the wheel
wrench.
...
If the wheel has a
smooth center piece or
a center piece with
recessed nuts, place
the flat end of the
wheel wrench in the
slot on the wheeland
pry out gently.
1
Using the wheel
wrench and ratchet,
with DOWN facing
you, loosen all the
wheel nuts.
I
Don’t remove them
yet.
Position the jack
under the vehicle.
5-32
NOTICE:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned will
damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack.
Be sureto fit the jack lift head into the proper location before
raising your vehicle.
Front Position
Position
Rear
Raise the vehicleby rotating the ratchet to the right. Make surethe UP
marking faces you. Use the jack handle extentions
if the flat is on the rear of
the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough
room for thespare tire to fit.
5-33
-
Remove all the wheel
nuts and takeoff the
flat tire.
Remove any rustor
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
surfaces and spare
wheel. Place the spare
on the wheel
mounting surface.
Replace the wheel
nuts with the rounded
end of the nuts toward
the wheel.
Tighten each wheel
nut by hand until the
wheel is held against
the hub.
Front Position
Rear Position
L
Lower the vehicle by rotating the ratchet to the left. Lower the jack
completely.
5 -35
Tightening Sequence
Tiqhten to the Left
Tighten the nuts firmly in a criss-cross sequence as shown. Rotate the
ratchet to the right with theUP marking facing you.
For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
Put the wheel trim backon. For vehicles with plastic nut caps, tighten the
caps until they arefinger tight, then tighten theman additional one-half turn
with the ratchet. Remove any wheel blocks.
Kernember, the jack and tire must be properly storedin their original stbfige
position before you begin driving again.The next part, “Storing the Jack
and Tire,” will show you how.
5-36
Storing theJack and Tire
Storing the Jack
Put the tools into the storage box and close ittightly. Fit the storagebox into
the bracketwith the bolt through the box. Put the jack onto the box.
Be sure
the jack pointsin the right direction as shown for your model. See the jack
and jack tools storage diagramsearlier in this section. Secure theemergency
gloves, if your vehicle has them, to the jackusing the provided strap.
Slide theretainer over thebolt onto the jackand put the wing nut on. Turn
the nut to the right until it is tight against the retainer.
Replace the jack storage
cover, if your vehicle has one, by simply reversing
the removal procedure described earlier.
5-37
Storing the Tire
Be sure the J-bolt is hooked properly for your model or tire size as shown.
Tire Storage -Wagon Model
If you have a wagon model, use these locations.
1 , I-Bolt
2. J-Bolt
3. Carrier
4. Spare Tire
5. Adapter
6. Nut
7. Cover
8. Use Lower Adapter Hole for
8-Lug Rim Only
5-38
Tire Storage -Utility Model
If you have a utility model, use these locations.
1. Carrier
2. J-Bolt
3. Adapter
4. Spare Tire
5. Nut
6. Cover
7. Pins
8. J-Bolt
9. Use Upper Hole and Pin for
LT265 Tire or Lower Hole and Pin
For LT225/245 Tires
Put the cover back on the tireif your vehicle has one.
Put the tire into the vehicle,over the bolt. Slide the adapter onto the bolt in
the proper location for your model, and putthe wing nut on. Turn the wing
nut to the right until the adapter is tight against the wheel, then close the
cover.
5-39
If You’re Stuck:In Sand, Mud, Iceor Snow
What you don’t want todo when your vehicle is stuck is to spinyour
wheels. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re
stuck, butyou must use caution.
NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as
the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your
your transmission.
transmission back and forth, you can destroy
Rocking your vehicle to get it out:
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That willclear the area around
your front wheels. Then shift back and forth between “R” (Reverse) and a
forward gear(or with a manual transmission, between First or Second gear
and Reverse), spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries,
you may need to be towedout. Or, you can use your recovery hooks, if your
vehicle has them. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
5-40
Using the Recovey Hooks
If you ever get stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, your vehicle may be
equipped with recovery hooks. The recovery hooks are provided at the front
of your vehicle. You may need to use them if you're stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving.
i.:.::::
8
. ._ .
5-41
NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle. Your vehicle
could be damaged andit would not be coveredby warranty.
5-42
Service & Appearance
Section
I
Here you will find information about the care
of your vehicle . This section
begins with service and fuel information. and then it shows how to check
important fluid and lubricant levels . There is also technical information
about your vehicle. and a section devoted to its appearance care.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . 6-4
Fuel (Gasoline Engines). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel Fuel Requirementsand Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Checking ThingsUnder the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-14
HoodRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
Cleaning Your Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
Engine Oil (Except Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Engine Oil (Diesel Engines) ...............................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Aircleaner ....................
Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
6-31
Manual Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33
6-34
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.................. 6 4 0
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-42
6-1
...................................
6-43
Replacing Brake System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46
Other Maintenance Items ....................................
646
Brake Master Cylinder
Lubrication .............
......................
..... 6 4 8
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Bulb Replacement .........................................
6-50
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56
.......................................
6-58
......................................
Tires ....................................................
6-59
..................................
6-62
Tire Inspectionand Rotation ...............................
6-64
When It’s Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-65
.....................................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .............................
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance .........................
6-66
Exhaust System
Loading Your Vehicle
Inflation-Tire
Pressure
Buying New Tires
Wheel Replacement .....................................
Tire Chains
............................................
..........................................
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .........................
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .....................
Appearance Care Materials ..................................
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specification Charts ......................................
Appearancecare
6-2
6-62
6-66
6-67
6-68
6-69
6-69
6-70
6-74
6-77
6-78
6-80
6-81
Service
Your GM dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it.
We hope you’llgo to your dealer forall your service needs. You’ll get
genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts
have one of these marks:
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll want to get the
proper GM Service Manual. It tells you much more about how to service
your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
“Service Publications”in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the
date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record”in the Index.
I NOTICE:
I
If you try to do your own service
work without knowing enough
about it, your vehicle could
be damaged.
6-3
Maintenance Schedule
Section 7 of this manual, “Scheduled MaintenanceServices”, explains the
maintenance your new vehicle needs, and when it should be done. Italso
has a form that you can use to record the maintenance work done on your
vehicle. Be sure to read this information.
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
If your vehicle has a dieselengine, see “Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel
System” in this Section. For vehicles with gasoline engines, please read this.
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. It should meet
specifications ASTM D4814 in the U.S. and CGSB 3.5-92 in Canada.
These fuels should have the proper additives, so you should not have to add
anything to the fuel.
In the U.S. and Canada, it’s easyto be sure you get the right kind of
gasoline (unleaded). You’ll see “UNLEADED” right on thepump. And only
unleaded nozzles will fit into your vehicle’s filler neck.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is less than 87, you
may get a heavy knocking noise when youdrive. If it’s bad enough, it can
damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel ratedat 87 octane or higher and you still hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service. Butdon’t worry if you hear a little
pinging noise when you’re acceleratingor driving up a hill. That’s normal
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the
heavy, constant knock that meansyou have a problem.
What about gasoline with blending materials thatcontain oxygen
(oxygenates), such as MTBE or alcohol?
MTBE is “methyl tertiary-butyl ether.” Fuel that is no more than
15% MTBE is fine foryour vehicle.
Ethanol is ethyl or grain alcohol. Properly-blended fuel that is no more than
10% ethanol is finefor your vehicle.
Methanol is methyl or wood alcohol.
NOTICE:
Fuel thatis more than5 % methanol is bad for your vehicle.
Don’t use it.It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be
covered under your warranty. And even5%
at or less, there
must be “cosolvents” and corrosion preventers in this fuel
to
help avoid these problems.
6-4
Gasolines for Cleaner Air
Your use of gasoline with deposit control additives will help prevent
deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. That helps keep your
engine in tune and your emission control system working properly. It’s good
for your vehicle, and you’ll be doing your part for cleaner air.
Many gasolines are now blended with oxygenates. General Motors
recommends that you use gasolines with these blending materials, such as
MTBE and ethanol. By doing so, you can help clean the air, especially in
those parts of the country that have high carbon monoxide levels.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated
gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. General Motors recommends that you use reformulated gasoline.
By doing so, you can help clean the air, especially in those parts of the
country that have high ozone levels.
You should ask your service station operators if their gasolines contain
deposit control additives and oxygenates, and if they have been
reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
Diesel Fuel Requirementsand Fuel System
Some states and provinces have restrictions on the purchase of diesel fuel
for light-duty vehicles and require you to buy permits or pay special taxes.
Some of these restrictions apply only to residents, and others apply to both
residents and visitors. These restrictions can change. To learn the current
restrictions in any state orprovince, contact your auto club, the police or
other officials.
Fuel Requirements
NOTICE:
Diesel fuel o r fuel additives not recommended in this manual
could damage your fuel system and engine,
Your warranty
wouldn’t cover this damage, And:
0
Diesel fuel that has beenmixed with engine oil could damage
your engine and emission controls.
Always check withyour
service station operator to make sure diesel
his fuel has not
been mixed with engineoil.
If you ever run outof diesel fuel, it can be difficultto restart
your engine. “Running Outof Fuel,” later in this section,
tells
you how to get it started again. To avoid all this, try never to
let your tankget empty.
6-5
What Fuel to Use
You can use either Number 1-D or Number 2-D diesel fuel, but you’ll get
better fuel economy using 2-D.
Diesel fuel may foam when you fill your tank. This can cause the automatic
pump nozzle to shut off, even though your tankisn’t full. If this happens,
just wait for the foamingto stop and then continue to fill your tank.
Cold Weather Operation
In cold weather (below 20”F, or -7”C), use 1-D or “Winterized” Number
2-D fuel (a blend of 1-D and 2-D). Be sure you get the right fuel. In very
cold temperatures(when it stays below 0°F or -18”C), use Number 1-D.
If you’re drivingin very cold temperatures and can’t get Number 1-D or a
“winterized” Number 2-D, you can use one gallon of kerosene for every
two gallons of diesel fuel. Once you add the kerosene, run your engine for
several minutes so the fuels will mix. Addkerosene only when the
temperature falls below 0°F (-1 8 “C), because the fuel economy of kerosene
isn’t as good as that of diesel fuel.
NOTICE:
Never use home heating oil or gasolineyour
in diesel engine.
They can cause engine damage.
In cold weather, your fuel filter may become clogged, especially if you use
Number 2-D diesel fuel that hasn’t been “winterized.” To unclog it, warm
the filterto between 32°F and 50°F (0°C to 10°C). You won’t need to
replace it.
6-6
Water in Fuel
Sometimes, water can be pumped into your fuel tank along with your diesel
fuel. This can happen if a service station doesn’t regularly inspect and clean
its fuel tanks, or if it gets contaminated fuel from its suppliers.
If this happens, a“WATER IN FUEL” light will come on. If it does,the
excess water must be drained. Your dealer can do this for you.
This light also should come on briefly when you start your engine, as a
check. If it doesn’t, have it fixed so it will be there to let you know if you
ever do getwater in your fuel.
If the light comes on at any other time,use this chart.
“WATER IN FUEL” LIGHT CHART
Problem
Light comes on intermittently.
Light stays on:
1 . At temperatures above
freezing.
Recommended Action
Drain water from fuel filter.
Drain fuel filter immediately. If no
water can be drained and light stays
on, seeyour dealer forassistance.
2. At temperatures below
freezing.
Drain fuel filter immediately. If no
water can be drained - water may
be frozen. Open the air bleed valve
to check for fuel pressure. If no fuel
pressure is present, replace the fuel
fi 1ter.
3. Immediately after refueling large amount of water possibly
pumped into fuel tank.
Fuel tank purging required. See
your dealer for assistance.
Hesitation or “flat” performance at high speed or during hard acceleration
may be an indication of premature fuel filter plugging due to dirty or
contaminated fuel. The filter elementmay need to be changed if this
happens. See your dealer forassistance.
If you drive when this warning light
is on, you can damage your
If the light comes on right
fuel injection system and your engine.
after you refuel,it means water was pumped into your fuel tank.
Turn off your engine immediately. Then, have the water drained
at once.
6-7
To drain water:
1 . Stop and park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn off the engine and apply
the parking brake.
2. Remove the fuel tank cap.
3. Place a fuel-resistant container under the filter drain hose.
4. With the engine
off, open the
water drain valve
2 to 3 turns.
When standing in
front of the
vehicle, the valve
is located on the
right side of the
thermostat
housing.
5. Start the engine and allow it to idle until clear fuel is observed.
6. Stop the engine and close the water drain valve.
7. Remove the fuel-resistant container and properly dispose of the
contaminated fuel. To find out howto properly dispose of contaminated
diesel fuel see “What to Do with Used Oil” in the “Engine Oil (Diesel
Engines)” part, later inthis section.
8. Install the fuel tank cap.
If the WATER IN FUEL light comes on again after drivinga short distance
or the engine runs rough or stalls-a large amount of water has probably
been pumped into the fuel tank. The fuel tank should be purged.
6-8
NOTICE:
If there is water in your diesel fuel and the weather
is warm or
humid, fungus and bacteria can grow in fuel.
the They can
to
damage your fuelsystem. You’ll need a diesel fuel biocide
sterilize your fuelsystem. Your dealer can adviseyou if you ever
need this.
If your fuel tank needs to be purged to remove water,
see your
dealer ora qualified technician. Improper purging can damage
your fuel system.
Running Out of Fuel (Diesel Engines)
If the engine stalls and you think that you’ve run out of fuel, do this:
First, open the fuel
filter air bleed valve.
If there is air, then you
are probably out of
fuel.
To restart your engine:
1. If you’re parked on a level surface, add at least two gallons of fuel.
However, if you’re parked on a slope, you may need to add up to five
gallons of fuel.
2 . With the air bleed valve open, turn your ignition key to “Start” for
10 to 15 seconds to crank (but not start) your engine. Keep doing this
until you can just see some clear fuel at the air bleed valve. (If, during
this step, the engine starts, turn the ignition off andclose the valve
before restart.)
6-9
3. Close the air bleed valve.
4. Turn the ignition key to “Start” for 10 to 15 seconas at a time until your
engine starts.
Fuel Filter Replacement (Diesel Engines)
If you want to change the fuel filter yourself, here’s howto doit:
Drain fuel fromthe filter by opening the air bleed valve andthe water drain
valve. This prevents the fuel from spilling as you replace the filter. Drainthe
fuel into a fuel-resistant container and dispose of it properly.
1. Turn off the engine and apply the parking brake.
2. Take off the fuel tank cap. This releases vacuum in the tank.
3. The filter is located at the rearof the intake manifold.
4. Unscrewand
remove the ring
nut from the top
of the filter head.
4;:
.
6- 10
5. Lift the element
out of the filter
head.
6. If there is any dirt
on the element
sealing surface of
the filter head,
clean it off.
7. Line up the
writing on the top
of the filter so it
faces (is readable
from) thefront of
the vehicle. Push
the element in
until the mating
surfaces touch.
8. With the air bleed valve open, turn your ignition key to RUN for 10 to
15 seconds. Wait one minute for your starter to cool. Do this until you
can see clear fuel coming from the air bleed valve.
9. Close theair bleed valve and replace the fuel cap.
10. Start your engine and let it idle for five minutes.Check your fuel filter
and air bleed valve for leaks.
6-11
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the U.S. or Canada,
unleaded fuel may be hard tofind. Do not use leaded gasoline. If you use
even one tankful, your emission controls won’t work well or atall. With
continuous use, spark plugs can get fouled, the exhaust system can corrode,
and your engine oil can deteriorate quickly. Your vehicle’s oxygen sensor
will be damaged. All of that means costly repairs that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the country where you’llbe driving.
You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where
you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation,
North American Export Sales (NAES)
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario
L l H 8P7
Filling Your Tank
The fuel cap is behind
a hinged door on the
left side of your
vehicle.
6-12
While refueling, hang
the capinside the fuel
door.
To take off the cap,
turn it slowly to the
left.
,
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline frompainted surfaces as
soon as possible. See “Cleaning the Outside
of Your Vehicle” inthe Index.
When you put the cap back on,
turn it to the right until you hear a clicking
noise.
I NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer
If’you get the wrong type, it may fit
notor
can get one for you.
have proper venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system
might be damaged.
6-13
Checking Things Underthe Hood
Hood Release
To open the hood, first
pull the handle inside
the vehicle.
Then go to the front of
the vehicle and pull up
on the secondary hood
release, located just to
the passenger side of
the center of the grill.
Lift the hood.
Your vehicle, if it has
air conditioning, may
have a auxiliary
engine fan in addition
to the belt driven fan.
6-14
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. Pull down
the hood and close it firmly.
Cleaning Your Diesel Engine
NOTICE:
If you spray or pour water
or any other liquidon your engine
when it is warmor hot, or when it is running, you could cause
If you ever clean the engine, clean it only
serious damage to it.
when it is cold.
6-15
Engine Oil(Except Diesel)
It's a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to
get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon
level ground.
r"'
'
1
'
Turn off the engine
and give the oil a few
minutes to drain back
into the oil pan.If you
don't, the oil dipstick
might not showthe
actual level.
To Check Engine Oil
I
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it
back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip lower.
When to Add Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you'll need to add some oil. But
you must use the right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For crankcase capacity, see "Capacities and Specifications" in theIndex.
6-16
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.
If your enginehas so much oil that the
oil level gets above the upper mark that
shows the proper
operating range, your engine could
be damaged.
The engine oil filler
cap is located on the
driver’s side engine
valve cover.
P
Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through.
What Kind of Oil to Use
Beginning midyear 1993, oils of the proper quality for your vehicle will be
identified with this new “starburst” symbol. The“starburst” symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute
(API), and is preferred foruse in your gasoline engine.
6-17
You should look for this on the front of the oil container, and use only oils
that display this new symbol.
You should also use the proper viscosity oilfor your vehicle, as shown in
the following chart:
LIGHT DUTY EMISSIONS -GAS ENGINES
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAL VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
LOOK FOR
ONE OF THESE
LABELS
HOT
WEATHER
\
C
F
'
- +38
+80.
. +27
+60
-+16
+4a.
.+4
-
'-7
+ 100
+20
0 -
-
18
SAE 1OW-30
I
SAE SW-30
PREFERRED
IF NEITHER SAE 5W-30 NOR SAE 1OW-30
GRADE OILS ARE AVAILABLE, SAE 30
GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATURES
ABOVE 40 DEGREES F (4 DEGREES C).
DO NOT USE SAE 1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR
ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you
can use SAE 1OW-30 if it's going to be 0°F (- 1 8 C) or above. These
numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 1OW-40 or SAE 20W-50.
O
6-18
HEAVY DUTY EMISSIONS -GAS ENGINES
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
LOOK FOR
ONE OF THESE
LABELS
HOT
WEATHER
"F
"C
+loo
- - +38
+80 - - + 2 7
+60
- - +16
I
t40--+4
+20 - - - I
0
- --18
I
SAE 1OW-30
PREFERRED
SAE 5W-30
COLD
WEATHER
IF NEITHER SAE 5W-30 NOR SAE 1OW-30
GRADE OILS ARE AVAILABLE, SAE 30
GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATURES
ABOVE 40 DEGREES F (4 DEGREES C).
DO NOT USE SA€ 1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR
ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
As shown in the chart, SAE IOW-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you
can use SAE 5W-30 if it's going to be colder than 60°F ( 16°C) before your
next oil change. When it's very cold, you should use SAE 5W-30. These
numbers on an oil containershow its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE lOW-40 or SAE 20W-50,
6-19
If you cannot find oils with the new “starburst” symbol on the front of the
container, you should look for and use oils containing the following three
things:
SHorSG
“SH’ or “SG’ must be on the oil container, either by itself or combined
with other quality designations, such as “SWCD,” “SH,SG, CD,”
“SGKD,” etc. These letters show American Petroleum Institute (API)
levels of quality.
e SAE 5W-30 -Vehicles
with Light Duty Emissions (8500 GVWR or
less) OR
SAE 1OW-30 -Vehicles with
more).
Heavy Duty Emissions (8501 GVWR or
Energy Conserving I1
Oils with these words on the container will help you save fuel.
These three things are usually included in a doughnut shaped logo (symbol)
on most containers. If you cannot find oils with the “starburst” symbol, you
should look for oils with the doughnut shaped symbol, containing the three
things noted above.
NOTICE:
If you use oils that do not have either the “starburst” symbol or
an API SH or SG designation, you can cause engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@oil (in Canada, GM Engine Oil) meets all the
requirements for your vehicle.
6-20
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready to advise if you
think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
See if any one of these is true for you:
Most trips are less than 4 miles (6 km).
0
It’s below freezing outside and most trips are less than 10 miles (16 km).
The engine is at low speed most of the time (as in door-to-door
delivery, or in stop-and-go traffic).
You tow a trailer often.
Most trips are through dusty places.
The vehicle is frequently operated off-road.
If any one of these is true for your vehicle, thenyou need to change youroil
andfifilterevery 3,000 miles (5 000 km)or 3 months - whichever comes
first .
Light Duty Emissions:
If none of them is true, change the oil every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or
12 months - whichever comes first. Change the filter at the first oil change
and at every other oil change after that.
Heavy Duty Emissions:
If none of them is true, change the oil every6,000 miles ( 10 000 km) or
12 months - whichever comes first. Change the filter at the first oil change
and at everyother oil change after that if mileage determines when you
change your oil. If time determines when you change your oil, change the
filter each time you change your oil.
Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater)
An engine coolant heater can be a big help if you have to park outside in
very cold weather, 0°F (-1 8 “C) orcolder. If your vehicle has this option,
see “Engine Coolant Heater ” in the Index.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay
on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails withsoap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Washor properly throw away clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use
and disposal of oil products.)
6-21
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment.If you change your own oil,
be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don't ever
dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring iton the ground, intosewers,
or into streams or bodiesof water. Instead, recycle itby taking it toa place
that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used
oil, ask your dealer,a service stationor alocal recycling centerfor help.
Engine Oil (Diesel Engines)
It's a good idea to check your engine oil level every time you get fuel. In
order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the
vehicle must
be on level ground.
Turn off theengine
and give the oil a few
minutes to drain back
into the oil pan. If you
don't, the oil dipstick
might not show the
actual level.
A
To Check Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or acloth, then push it
back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip lower.
6-22
When to Add Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need to add some oil. But
you must use the right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For crankcase capacity, see “Capacitiesand Specifications” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.
If your engine hasso much oil that the
your engine
oil level gets above the proper operating range,
could be damaged.
The engine oil filler
cap is located on a
filler tube at the front
of the engine.
Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through.
6-23
What Kind of Oil to Use
Look for these two things:
0 CF4SH
CF-4/SH is the best oil for your vehicle. However, if you can not find
CF-4/SH oil, you may use CF-4/SG or CE/SH or CE/SG oil.
These may be listed as shown or in reverse order, for example
SWCF-4. Other letters may also be listed, such as SH/CD, CE, CF-4.
These letters show American Petroleum Institute (API) levels of
quality.
NOTICE:
If you use oils that don’t have these designations,
you can cause
by your warranty.
~ginedamage which is not covered
6-24
DIESEL ENGINES
I
RECOMMENDED
SAE
VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
SELECT THE SAE GRADE 011 BASED ON
THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE
BEFORE
CHANGE
NEXT OIL
I
HOT
WEATHER
+loo
-
+60
- - +16
+32
--
0
-20
LABEL
- - -18
--
r
-SAE 30
0
SAE 15W-40
PREFERRED
-29
above 0°F
(-18%)
SAE 1OW-30
\
________
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 1DW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR
ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
S A E 15W-40
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 15W-40 is best for your vehicle.
However, you can use SAE low-30 if it’s going to be colder than
32°F (0°C) before your next oil change. When it’s very cold, below
0°F (-1 8”C), you should use SAE IOW-30 to improve cold starting.
Also,SAE 30 may be used at temperatures above freezing, 32°F (0°C).
These numbers on the oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do
not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 10W-40 or SAE 20W-50.
6-25
This doughnut-shaped logo (symbol) is used on most oil containers to help
you select the correct oil.
You should look for this on the oil container, and use only those oils that
display the logo.
GM Goodwrench@oil (in Canada, GM Engine Oil) meets all the
requirements foryour vehicle.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready to advise if you
think somethingshould be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
See if any one of these is true for you:
Most trips are less than 4 miles (6 km).
0
It’s below freezing outsideand most trips are less than 10 miles
(16 km).
0
The engine isat low speed most of the time (as in door-to-door
delivery, or in stop-and-go traffic).
You tow a trailer often.
0
Most trips are through dusty places.
The vehicle is frequently operated off-road.
If any of these is true for your vehicle, then you need to change your oil and
filter every 2,500 miles (4 000 km) or 3 months - whichever comes first.
If none of them is true, change the oil and filterevery 5,000 miles
(8 000 km) or 12 months- whichever comes first.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay
on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw awayclothing or rags
containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use
and disposal of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil.
be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t
ever disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to
a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of
your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
6-26
Air Cleaner
Refer to the
Maintenance Schedule
to determine when to
replace theair filter.
See “Scheduled
Maintenance
Services” in the Index.
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner isoff, a backfire can cause a damaging engine
fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.
6-27
To remove the air
cleaner filter on a gas
engine or a 6.5 liter
naturally aspirated
diesel, turn the wing
nuts to the left.
Remove the cover and
change the filter.
To remove the air cleaner filter on a 6.5 liter turbocharged diesel,first
remove the rubber elbow. Remember to observe the caution about
turbocharger blades on the rubber elbow,
Then, unhook the
cover retaining clips
and push therear of
the cover toward the
engine.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluidlevel is when the
engine oil is changed. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
when to change your fluid. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the
Index.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this
done at a GM dealership Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could
get a false reading on the dipstick.
6-28
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission.
Too
much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and on
fall
hot engine partsor exhaust system, startinga fire. Be sureto get
an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you
have been driving:
0
When outside temperaturesare above 90°F (32°C).
0
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -especially in hot weather.
0
While pulling a trailer.
To get theright reading, the fluid should be at normal operating
temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).
To check transmissionfluid hot: Get the vehicle warmed up by driving
about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperaturesare above 50°F (IOOC).
If it’s colder than 50°F (IOOC), drive thevehicle in “D” (3rd Gear) until the
engine temperaturegage moves and then remains steady forten minutes.
Then follow the hot check procedures.
To check transmissionfluid cold: A cold check is made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eighthours or more with the engineoff and is used only as a
reference. Let the engine run at idle for fiveminutes if outside temperatures
are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (IOOC), you mayhave to
idle the enginelonger. Should the fluid level be low during acold check,
you must perform a hot check before adding fluid. This will give you a more
accurate readingof the fluid level.
To check thefluid hot or cold
Park your vehicle on a level place.
e With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in “ P ’ (Park).
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each
gear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range. Then,
position the shift lever in “P” (Park).
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting offthe engine, follow these steps:
6-29
1. Flip the handle
up and then pull
out the dipstick
and wipe it with a
clean rag or paper
towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull
it back out
again.
3. Check both sides
of the dipstick,
and read the
lower level. The
fluid level must
be in the COLD
area for a cold
check or inthe
HOT area or
cross-hatched
area for a hot
check.
4. If the fluid level
is in the
acceptable range,
push the dipstick
back in allthe
way; then flip the
handle down to
lock the dipstick
in place.
WOW to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission
fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’ in theIndex.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the
level up to the COLD area for a cold check or the HOT area for a hot check.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than a pint. Don’t overfill.We
recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON@-I11 or DEXRON@-IIE,
because fluids with that label are made especially for your automatic
transmission. Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON@-I11 or
DEXRON@-IIE is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to
Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all
the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed. However,
the fluid in your manual transmission doesn’t require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this
done at a GM dealership Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could
get a false reading.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission.
Too
much can mean that someof the fluid could come out and fall on
hot engine partsor exhaust system, starting a fire. Be sure
to get
an accurate reading you
if check your transmissionfluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on
a level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers
on the transmission case.
6-31
Then, follow these steps:
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure it is fully seated. If
the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described in the next steps.
How to Add Fluid
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Index.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at thefiller plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch in your vehicle is self-adjusting. A slight amount of
play (1/4 inch to 1/2 inch) in the pedal is normal.
When to Check and What to Use
Refer to the
Maintenance Schedule
to determine how
often you should
check the fluid level
in your clutch master
cylinder reservoir and
for the proper fluid.
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants’’ in the Index.
How to check
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not reach the bottom of
the diaphragm when it’s in place in the reservoir.See the instructions on the
reservoir cap.
Rear Axle
When to Checkand Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the
lubricant and when to change it. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in
the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below
the bottom of the filler
plug hole, you’ll need
to add some lubricant.
Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler
plug hole.
6-33
Whai to Use
Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine what kind of lubricant to
use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Four- Wheel Drive
Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to four-wheel-drive
vehicles. However, they have two additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how oftento check the
lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below
the bottom of the filler
plug hole, you’ll need
to add some lubricant.
Add enough lubricant
to raise the levelto the
bottom of the filler
plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine what kind of lubricant to
use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
6-34
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check the
lubricant and when to changeit. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”in
the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below
the bottom of the filler
plug hole, you’ll need
to add some lubricant.
If the differential is at
operating temperature
(warm), add enough
lubricant to raise the
level to the bottom of
the fillerplug hole.
If the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1/2 inch
(12 mm) below the filler plug hole.
What to use
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of lubricant to
use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
The following explainsyour cooling system and how to add coolant when it
is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating,see “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
The proper coolant for your vehicle will:
Give freezing protectiondown to -20°F (-29”C), or -34°F (-37°C) in
Canada and for vehicles with the cold climateoption.
Give boiling protectionup to 258°F (125°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.
6-35
What to Use
use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably distilled) and one-half
antifreeze that meets “GM Specification 6038-M,” which won’t damage
aluminum parts. You can also use a recycled coolant conforming to “GM
Specification 6038-M” with a completecoolant flush and refill. If you use
this mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mix, your engine could overheat
and be badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn’t be covered
by
your warranty. TOOmuch water in the mix can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and otherparts.
Some conditions, such as air trapped in the cooling system,can affect the
coolant level in the radiator. Check the coolant level when the engine is cold
and follow the steps under “Adding Coolant” forthe proper way to add
coolant.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer
check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you usethe proper coolant, you don’t have to add extra
inhibitors or additives which claim toimprove the system. These
can be harmful.
6-36
Adding Coolant -Gas Engines
The coolantrecovery
tank is located on the
passenger side at the
rear comer of the
engine compartment
To Check Coolant
When your engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at COLD, or alittle
higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be up to HOT, or a little
higher.
To Add Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the propermix at the coolant recovery tank.
Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.
6-37
Adding Coolant-Diesel Engines
..
The coolant surge tank
is located on the
passenger side at the
rear corner of the
engine compartment
To Check Coolant
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at theCOLD mark,
or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be above the
COLD mark.
If this light comes on,
it means you're low
on engine coolant.
To Add Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper mix ut the surge tank, but only
when the engine is cool.
Open the bleed valve on the thermostat housing to allow trapped air out of
the system. Close the bleed valve when coolant begins to flow out.
6-38
Radiator Pressure Cap-Gas Engines
The radiator pressure
cap must be tightly
installed with the
arrows on the cap
lined up with the
ovefflow tube on the
radiator filler neck.
I
I
NOTICE:
Your radiator capis a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and
must be tightly installedto prevent coolantloss and possible
engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows
on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.
Surge Tank Pressure Cap- Diesel Engines
The surge tank
pressure cap must be
tightly installed with
the arrows on the cap
lined up with the top
tube of the coolant
surge tank.
NOTICE:
Your surge tank pressure cap 1s a unique 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap foruse with surge tank cooling systems only.
It must be tightly installedto prevent coolant loss and possible
engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrowson the cap
line up with the top tube of the coolant surge tank.
Thermostat
Engine coolanttemperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine
coolant system. The thermostat
stops the flow of coolant through the
radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature.
When you replace your thermostat, an AC@thermostat is recommended.
Power Steering Fluid
I NOTICE:
Always turn the engine off before checkingor adding power
steering fluid. The power steering pump cap is close tothe fan
and othermoving parts.
6-40
How To CheckPower Steering Fluid
Unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstick with
a clean rag. Replace
the cap and
completely tighten it.
Then remove the cap
again and look at the
fluid level on the
dipstick.
l
0
When the engine
compartment is
hot, the level
should be at the
FULL mark.
When the engine
compartment is
cool, the level
should be at the
FULL COLD
mark.
Whaf fo Add
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
NOTICE:
When adding power steering fluid
or making a complete fluid
the proper
change, alwaysuse the proper fluid. Failure to use
fluid can cause leaks
and damage hoses andseals.
6-41
Hydro-Boost Brake System (Hydraulic Pump)
The power steering pump is also used as the Hydro-boost pump. Refer to
“Power Steering System” in this section when checking fluid level or
adding fluid.
Windshield Washer Fluid
To Add
Open the cap labeled
“WASHER FLUID
ONLY.” Add washer
fluid until the bottle is
full.
~
NOTICE:
0
When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can
cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid
tank andother parts of the washer system. Also,water
doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only 3/4 full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion, which coulddamage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It
can damage your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Master Cylinder
4
Your brake master
cylinder is here. It is
filled with DOT-3
brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in your master cylinder
might go down. Thefirst is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the
fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leakingout of the
brake system. If it is,you should have your brake system fixed, since aleak
means that sooner orlater your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at
all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid
won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then
you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when workis done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check your brake
fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
in the Index.
To Check BrakeFluid
m
You can check the
brake fluid without
taking off the cap. Just
look at the windows
on the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid
levels should be above
“MIN.” If they aren’t,
have your brake
system checked to see
if there is aleak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the levels are
above ‘“IN‘’ and below the top of each window.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid - such as
Delco Supremel l @(GM Part No.1052535). Use new brakefluid from a
sealed container only, andalways clean the brake fluid reservoir cap before
removing it.
0
Don’t let someone put in thewrong kind of fluid. For
example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they’li have to be replaced.
Brake fluid can damage paint, so be careful not to spillbrake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, washit off immediately. See
“Appearance Care” in the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The
sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving
(except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin
costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are firstapplied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
Rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear
brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspected. Also, the rear
brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are
removed for rotation or changing. When you have the front brakes replaced,
have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Trave/
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if
there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake
trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes adjust for wear.
T f your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your rear drum brakes
may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying the
brakes a few times.
6-45
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to
be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to havereally good
braking. Vehicles we design and test have top-quality GM brake parts in
them, as your vehicle does when it is new. When you replace parts of your
braking system - for example, when your brake linings wear down and
you have to have new ones put in - be sure you get new genuine GM
replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change, forthe
worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Other Maintenance Items
Front Suspensionand Steering Linkage
Your maintenance schedule will tell you how often to lubricate the fittings.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for the proper
lubricant to use.
Front Wheel Bearing
Your vehicle has front wheel bearings that must be cleaned and repacked.
Your maintenance schedule will tell you how often this must be done.
Front Shock Absorbers
The front shock absorbers of your vehicle do many things. They help the
vehicle ride smoothly and also control the travel of the suspension system.
When the shock absorbers are serviced, any replacement shock absorbers
must be the same as the original equipment shock absorbers in both
extended length and strength.
I NOTICE:
If you use shock absorbers that are not the same
as the original
shock absorbers, the shock absorbers or suspension system
could be damaged.
6-46
Wheel Nut Torque
For vehicles with dual wheels, when the vehicle, wheel or fasteners are new,
have the torque set at the first 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1600 and
9600 km). Use the torquespecified in the appropriate SpecificationChart
later in this section.
Single Belt Accessory Drive
If your new vehicle uses a serpentine belt, it is lighter, and more durable
than systems with several belts.
The belt ruIl 'li'vkf br iir6und the pulleys or^ the engine. A tensione'r'n'iay be
used to keep the belt tight at all times. The tensioneralso makes replacing
the belt easier if you need to replace the belt, be sure to get the correct
replacement belt. Your dealership or parts supplier can help you with this.
The Accessory Drive BeltRouting label on your vehicle will show you how
to route thebelt your vehicle uses.
Windshield Wiper Blade lnserts
To replace your
windshield wiper
blade inserts, lift the
wiper arm and rotate
the blade until it is
facing away from the
windshield.
Unlatch the end of the insert from the holding clips. Removethe insert and
slide a new one in place. Make sure the blade is secured in the clips.
Air Conditioning
Every now and then have your dealership check your air conditioning
system to be sure it has not lost any cooling ability. If you think the system
is not working properly, have your dealership checkit out as soon as
possible.
The air conditioning will not work whenthe temperature is below 40°F
(4°C).
6-47
Fluid Leak Check
After the vehicle has been parked for a while, inspect the surface under the
vehicle forwater, oil, fuel or other fluids. Water dripping from the air
conditioning system after it has been used is normal. If you notice fuel leaks
or fumes, the causes should be found and corrected at once.
Lubrication
Accelerator Control System
Your maintenance schedule will tell you how often the accelerator linkage
pivot points must be lubricated. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index for the proper lubricant to use.
Accelerator cablesand cruise control cables should not be lubricated. Any
cables that are worn or are hard to pull should be replaced.
Hood Latches andHood Hinge
Your maintenance schedule will tell you how often to lubricate the hood
latch and hood hinge assembly. See the Index under “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” forthe proper lubricant to use.
Propeller ShaftSlip Splines
See your maintenance schedule to find out how often the slip splines must
be lubricated. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for
the proper lubricant to use.
Constant Velocity Joints
See your maintenance schedule to find out how often the constant velocity
joints must be lubricated. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Index for theproper lubricant to use.
Normal use of your vehicle will cause metal to metal wearat some points on
the cab and body if they are not lubricated.
For exposed surfaces, suchas door checks, door lock bolts, lock striker plates,
dovetail bumper wedges, etc.,a thin film of engine oil should be applied.
The seat adjusters and seat track should be lubricated with chassis grease.
Door weather strips and rubber hood bumpers should be lightly coated with
a rubber lubricant.
Never use too much of any lubricant and be sureto wipe up anyextra
lubricant when you are finished.
6-48
Your maintenance schedulewill tell you how often to lubricate these items.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for the proper
lubricant to use.
Lock Cylinders
To be sure your locks operate
properly, they must be lubricated. Your
vehicle’s maintenance schedulewill tell you how often to lubricate them.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for theproper
lubricant to use.
You should not use penetrating oils because they could wash out the factory
installed lubricant and cause thelock to bind. De-icers which contain
alcohol couldalso wash away the lubricant, so be sure to lubricate the lock
after using a de-icer of this type.
Tailgate Handle
The tailgate handle pivotpoints on your vehicle should be lubricatedto keep
it working smoothly.
Your maintenance schedulewill tell you how often to lubricate the handle.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for the proper
lubricant to use.
Battery
Every new GM vehicle has a Delco Freedom@
battery. You never haveto
add water to one of these. When it’s time for anew battery, we recommend
a Delco Freedom@
battery. Get onethat has the catalog number shown on
the original battery’s label.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, take off the
black, negative (-) cable from thebattery. This will help keep your battery
from running down.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage
periods.
Bulb Replacement
Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lights are off and the
engine isn't running.
Sealed Beam Headlights
1. Remove the four
screws from the
headlight retainer.
2. Pull the headlight
out and remove
the retainer.
3. Unplug and
remove the
headlight.
4. Plug in the new
headlight and put
it inplace.
5. Install the
retainer to the
headlight and
tighten the
screws.
Halogen Bulbs
6-50
NOTICE:
Avoid touching the bulb or letting it come in contact with
anything damp. Oil fromyour skin or moisture on the bulb can
cause the bulb to explode when isit turned on.If either comesin
it with alcohol or a suitable
contact with the bulb, clean
degreaser and wipe the bulb dry.
Composite Headlights
i
.'
--6n
k
1 . Remove the two
screws at the top
of the radiator
support.
2. Pull the headlight
lens assembly
out.
3. Unplugthe
electrical
connector.
4. Turn the bulb to
the left and
remove it.
'I
5. Put the new bulb in the lens assembly and turn it to the right until it is
tight.
6. Plug in the electrical connector.
7. Put the headlight lens assembly back into the vehicle. Install and
tighten the two screws.
6-51
Front Parkingnurn Signal Lights with
Sealed Beam Headlights
1. Remove the two screws at the inside edge of the parkinghurn signal
light assembly.
2. Remove the light assembly by swinging it out from the inside edge and
sliding it out at the outside edge.
3. Squeeze the tab on the side of the light socket while turning the socket
to the left.
4. Pull the socket out of the light assembly.
5. Push in gently on thebulb, turn it to the left and remove it from the
socket.
6. Put the new bulb in the socket, gently press in on the bulb and turn it to
the right until it is tight.
7. Put the socket back into the light assembly and turn it socket to the
right until it locks.
8. Put the parkinghrn signal light assembly back into the vehicle and
tighten the screws.
Front Parkingnurn Signal Lights with
Composite Headlights
1. Removethe
screws and take
out the
parkinghum
signal light
assembly.
2. Squeeze the tab
on the side of the
light socket while
turning the socket
to the left.
6-52
the left and
remove it from
the socket.
5. Put the new bulb in the socket, gently press in on the bulb and turn it to
the right until it is tight.
6. Put the socket back into the light assembly and turn it socket to the
right until it locks.
7. Put the parking/turn signal light assembly back into the vehicle and
tighten the screws.
Side Marker Lights with Sealed Beam
and Composite Headlights
1. Remove the
screws and pull
out the
parking/tum
signal light
assembly.
2. Reach through
the opening and
turn the side
marker bulb
socket to the left
and remove it.
6-53
-
3. Pull the bulb
straight out of the
socket.
4. Put a new bulb
into the socket
and push it in
until it istight.
5. Put the socket back into the side marker assembly and turn it to the
right to tighten it.
6 . Replace the parking/turn signal light assembly and tighten the screws.
Roof Marker Lights
1. Remove the
screws and lift off
the lens.
2. Pull the bulb
straight out of the
socket.
3. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until it is tight.
4. Replace the lens and tighten the screws.
6-54
Center High MountStop/amp (CHMSL)
“,Gar-&
... “B3
The individualbulbs
in theCHMSL are not
replaceable. See your
dealer forassistance.
Rear Lights
1. Open the tailgate or rear doors.
2. Remove the two black plastic plugs in the rear light assembly access
holes.
3. Remove the two
I
rear light
assembly screws
inside the fender
and pull out the
light assembly.
You may want to
use a magnetic
screwdriver when
removing the
screws.
6-55
4. Remove the
screws from the
bulb retainer and
take the bulb
retainer off of the
light assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb
straight out of the
socket.
6. Put in a new bulb and push it in until it is tight.
7. Replace the bulb retainer.
8. Replace the rear light assembly and tighten thescrews. You may want
to use a magnetic screwdriver when installing the screws.
9. Close the tailgate or rear doors.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses, circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links in the
wiring itself. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical
problems. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Indexfor more
information.
The headlight wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in the light switch.An
electrical overload will cause the lights to flicker on and off, or in some
cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlight wiring checked
right away.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If
the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the
motor cools. Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload,
overload due to heavy snow, etc., may cause wiper linkage damage. Always
clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield
wipers. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow,
etc., be sure to getit fixed.
6-56
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect
the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current loadis too heavy, the circuit breaker
opens and closes. This protects the circuit until the current loadreturns to
normal or the problem is fixed .
Trailer Wiring Harness
The optionalseven-wire trailer wiring harness is protected by an in-line
fuse in the battery feed wire. This fuseis near the junction block. See
“Trailer Wiring Harness” in the Index for more information.
Fuse Block
The fuseblock is
behind an access door
at the bottomof the
instrument panel, next
to the parking brake
release lever.
You can remove fuses
with a fuseextractor,
if you have one.
To remove fuses if you don’t have one,hold the end of the fusebetween
your thumb and index fingerand pull straight out.
Be sureto use the correct fuse. If you ever have aproblem on the road and
don’t have a spare fuse,you can “borrow” oneof the correct value. Just pick
6-57
some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without-like the radio
or cigarette lighter-and use its fuse, if it isof the value you need.
Replace
it as soon as you can. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers’’ in the Index for
more information.
Exhaust System
To help prevent damage to your exhaust system, do not continue to drive
your vehicle if you notice:
Engine misfiring
Loss of performance
Other unusual operating conditions
Have your engine and exhaust system serviced regularly.
Three- Way Catalytic Converter (gas engines)
Your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converter isdesigned to reduce the
pollutants in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use only unleaded fuel in your vehicle.
If you use leaded fuel, you could damage your three-way catalytic converter
and other enginecomponents.
Three- Way Catalytic Converter (diesel engines)
Your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converter isdesigned to reduce the
particulates in your vehicle’s exhaust. If your vehicle’s three-way catalytic
converter everneeds to bereplaced, itmust be replaced with a three-way
catalytic converter intended for use with diesel engines only.
Engine Contro/ Module System (AllT61 equipped
vehicles and diesel engine vehicles below
8,500 lbs. GVWR)
Gasoline Engines
This system has an oxygen sensor (02) that helps keep your engine’s
air-fuel mixture at a proper level. Use onlyunleaded fuel in your vehicle. If
you use leaded fuel,you could damage your oxygen sensor (02) and
three-way catalytic converter.
Diesel Vehicles BelowS,5UU LBS. GVWR
This system monitors engine speed and throttle position. It adjusts exhaust
gas recirculation to limit emissions.
Malfunction Indicator
(SERVICE ENGINE SOON) Lamp
The Malfunction Indicator (SERVICE ENGINE SOON)Lamp on your
instrument panel lets you know when your emission system needs service.
The light will come on briefly when you start your engine to let you know
that the system is working. If it does not come on when you start your
engine, or if it comes on and stays on while you're driving, your system
may need service. Your vehicle should still be driveable, but you should
have your system servicedright away.
Secondary Air Injection Reaction(AIR) System
You may have this system. It has a control valve that will direct air to where
it is needed. If the AIR system needs service, your Malfunction Indicator
(SERVICE ENGINE SOON)Lamp on your instrument panel will come
on.
Loading Your Vehicle
The CertificatiodTire
label is found on the
rear edge of the
driver's door.
MFD BY GENERAL MOT0RSCORP
i-IN EFFECT
q----p nri
w
I
[ISPEED
uMODELSIZE
TIRE
RTG
FilM
PSllKPA (COLD)
SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures
needed to obtain the grossweight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
The Certificatioflire label also tells you the maximum weights for the
front and rear axles, called Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out
the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure
to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.
6-59
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR for either the front
or rearaxle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not
change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle
the right way.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover partsor components that fail
because of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle-like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else-they go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or
turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
Trailering Package
If your vehicle comes with the Trailering Package, there is also a load rating
which includes the weight of the vehicle and the trailer it tows. This rating
is called the Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR).
When you weigh your trailer, be sure to include the weight of everything
you put in it. And,remember to figure the weight of the people inside as
part of your load.
Your dealer can help you determine your GCWR.
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the CWR for your vehicle. Weigh
your vehicle with the trailer hitch attached, so that you won’t go over the
GVWR or the GAWR.
You’ll get thebest performance if you spread out the weight of your load
the right way, and if you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see “Trailer Towing’’ in the Index.
Add-on Equipment
When you carry removable items, like snow plow blades,you may need to
put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle. Be sure to
weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment.
~
NOTICE:
Your warranty doesn’t cover parts
or components that fail
because of overloading.
6-61
Tires
We don’t make tires. Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made
by a leadingtire manufacturer. These tires are warranted by the tire
manufacturers and their warranties are delivered with every new vehicle. If
your spare tire is a different brand than your road tires, you will have a tire
warranty folder from each of these manufacturers.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
The Certification/Tire label which is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, or
on the incompletevehicle document in the cab, shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires, when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has
been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than a mile.
6-62
You can operatesome vehicles at reduced inflation pressures only when
you’ll be carryingreduced loads. On those vehicles, the minimum cold
inflation pressures for atypical reduced load are printed on the “Improved
Ride Tire Pressure”label located on thedriver’s door. Weigh the vehicleto
find the loadon each tire and see thelabel for theminimum cold inflation
pressures forthat load.
Don’t let anyone tell youthat underinflation or overinflation is
all right. It’s not. Ifyour tires don’t have enoughair
(underinflation) you can get:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get:
0
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires oncemonth
a
or more. Also, check thetire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to Check
Use a goodquality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. Simply looking
at the tires will not tell you the pressure, especially if you have radial tires
- which may look properlyinflated even if they’re underinflated.
If your tires have valve caps, be sureto put them back on. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
Special Tire lnflation
If you have 16 inch tires on your vehicle, and:
-
You’ll be driving for very long at speeds of 66 mph (105 k d h ) to
75 mph (120 km/h) where legal, inflate tires to 10 psi (70 kPa)
more than the recommended cold inflation pressures.
-
You’ll be driving for very long at speeds of 76 mph ( 120 k d h ) to
85 mph (135 k d h ) where legal, cold inflation pressures should be
increased by 10 psi (70 kPa) and you must also reduce axle load
capacity by 10%. Do not drive over85 mph (135 km/h) even if
it’s legal.
Inflation pressures should never exceed 10 psi (70 kPa) above the
inflation specified for the maximum load of the tire.
Tire lnspection and Rotation
To make your tires last longer, have them inspected and rotated the
at
mileages recommended in the Maintenance Schedule. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index.
Use this rotation
FRT
FRT
pattern.
If your vehicle has front tires with different load ratings or tread designs
(such as all season vs. on/off road) than the rear tires,don’t rotate your tires
front to rear.
After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressure
as shown on the Certificationmire label. Make certain that all wheelnuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
6-64
When / t’s Time for New Tires
TREAD WEAR
INDICATORS
L
E
One way to tell when
it’s time for new tires
is to check the
treadwear indicators,
which will appear
when your tires have
only 2/32 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
You need a uew tire if
0
You can see theindicators at three or more places around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber.
The tread orsidewall is cracked, cutor snagged deep enough to show
cord or fabric.
0
The tirehas a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or otherdamage that can’t be repaired well
because of the size or locationof the damage.
6-65
Buying New Tires
To find outwhat kind andsize of tires you need, look at the
CertificatiodTire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance
Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you
get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way, your
vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during
normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by a “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction
type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Uniform TireQuality Grading
The followinginformation relates to the system developed by the United
States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires
by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States.)
Treadwear
The treadwear gradeis a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled conditionson a specified government test
course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and a half ( 1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and
climate.
6-66
Traction - A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are: A, B, and C. They represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A
tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight-ahead) traction tests and doesnot include cornering (turning)
traction.
Temperature - A, ByC
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s
dissipate heat when tested
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel.
Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire todegenerate
and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for atire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately in
or combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
These gradesare molded on the sidewallsof passenger car tires.
While the tires available as standard or optional equipmenton General
Motors vehicles may vary withrespect to these grades,all such tires meet
General Motors performance standardsand have been approved for use on
General Motors vehicles. All passenger type (P Metric) tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Wheel Alignmentand Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not needto have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or
the other, the alignmentmay need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be
rebalanced.
6-67
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel thatis bent, cracked or badly rusted. If wheel nuts keep
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If
the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can
sometimes be repaired). See your GM dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity, diameter,
width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts,
replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you
will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your
GM model.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearing life,
brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, headlight aim,
bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has LT265/75R16 sizetires, don’t use tire chains;
they can damage your vehicle.
If you have a tire size other thanLT265/75Rl6, usetire chains
only where legaland only when you must. Use only
SAE Class
“S” type chains that arethe proper size for your tires. Install
them on the tires of the rear axle. Tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow
the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear thechains
contacting your vehicle, stop andretighten them. If the contact
continues, slow downuntil it stops. Driving too fast with chains
on will damage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can
burst into flameif you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if you brea.the their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to
follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your
doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
0
Gasoline
0
Benzene
0
0
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Naphtha
0
Lacquer Thinner
Carbon Tetrachloride
0
Nail Polish Remover
Acetone
They can all be hazardous - some more than others -and they can all
damage your vehicle, too.
NOTICE:
Don’t use anyof these unlessthis manual says you can.In many
uses, these will damage your vehicle:
0
Laundry Soap
0
Bleach
0
Reducing Agents
CIeaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipevinyl or
leather with a clean, damp cloth.
Your GM dealer has two GM cleaners, a solvent-type spot lifter and a
foam-type powdered cleaner. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. Do not use them on vinyl or leather.
Here are somecleaning tips:
0
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -before they set.
Use a cleancloth or sponge,and change to a clean areaoften. A soft
brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use
them, don’t saturate the stained area.
If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or
it will set.
Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric
Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim
along stitch or welt lines.
Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner followingthe directions on the
container label.
Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
Don’t saturate the material.
Don’t rub it roughly.
As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a spongeto remove me
suds.
Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel or cloth.
0
Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer or a heat lamp.
NOTICE:
Be careful witha hair dryeror heat lamp. You could scorch the
fabric.
0
Wipe with a clean cloth.
Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric
First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner atall. Some spots and
stains will clean off better with just water and mild soap.
If you need to use a solvent:
Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with a clean, dull knife
or scraper. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths
(preferably cheesecloth). Cleaningshould start at the outside of the
stain, “feathering” toward the center. Keep changing to a clean section
of the cloth.
When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately dry the area with an
air hose, hair dryer, or heat lamp to help prevent a cleaningring. (See
the previousNOTICE.)
6-71
Fabric Protection
Your vehicle has upholstery and trim cifpet that has been treated with
Scotchgard" Fabric Protector, a 3M product. Scotchgard" protects fabrics
by repelling oil and water, whichare the carriers of most stains. Even with
this protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and trim carpet often
to keep it looking new.
Further information on cleaning is available by calling 1-800-433-3296
(in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6 167).
Special Cleaning Problems
Greasy or Oily Stains
Such as grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe polish, coffee with cream,
chewing gum,cosmetic creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt.
Carefully scrapeoff excess stain.
Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.
Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left on a vehicle
seat fabric. They should be removed as soon as possible. Be careful,
because the cleaner will dissolve them and may cause them to spread.
Non-Greasy Stains
Such ascatsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, wine,
vomit, urine and blood.
Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool
water.
0
If a stain remains, follow thefoam-type instructions described earlier.
If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
waterhaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup
(250 ml) of lukewarm water.
0
If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
Combination Stains
Such as candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains.
Carefully scrape off excess stain, then clean with cool water and allow
to dry.
If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.
6-72
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a cleancloth.
Rub with a clean, damp clothto remove dirt. You may have to do it
more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them
off quickly. Use a cleancloth and a solvent-type vinyl cleaner.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddlesoap.
For stubborn stains, use a mild solution of 10%isopropyl alcohol
(rubbing alcohol) and 90% water.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture
polish or shoe polishon leather.
Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work
into finish, it can
harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument
panel. Sprays containingsilicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections
in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean anddry.
6-73
Glass
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM Part No. 1050427)
or aliquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and
dust films.
Don’t use abrasive cleanerson glass, because they may cause scratches.
Avoid placing decalson the inside rear window, since they may have to be
scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on theinside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged. Any temporary
license should not be attached across the defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outsideof the Windshield,
Backglass and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the
wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the
blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami
Powder@(GM Part No. 1050011). The windshield is clean if beads do not
form when you rinse it with water.
Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Wiper blades should be checked on a regular basis and replaced when worn.
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss
retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The bestway to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing
it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Use liquid hand, dish or carwashing (mild
detergent) soaps. Don’t use cleaning agents that contain acid or abrasives.
All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dryon
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,clean chamois or
a 100%cotton towel to avoid surface scratchesand water spotting.
High pressure vehicle washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.
6-74
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle may be necessary to
remove residue fromthe paint finish. You can get GM approved cleaning
products fromyour dealer. (See “Appearance Careand Materials” in the
Index.)
Your vehicle may have a “ba~ec~at/clearc~at”
paint finish. The clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat.Always use waxes and
polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoatklearcoatpaint
finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compoundingor aggressive polishingon a
basecoatklearcoat paint finish
may dull the finish or leave swirl
marks.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster. Washing
with water is all that is usually needed. However, you may use GM Chrome
Polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim,
never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coatingof wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright
metal parts.
Aluminum Wheels (If So Equipped)
Your aluminum wheels have a protective coatingsimilar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, chromepolish,
abrasive cleanersor abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could
damage this coating. After rinsing thoroughly, a wax may be applied.
NOTICE:
If you have aluminumwheels, don’t use an automatic vehicle
wash that has hard silicon carbide cleaning brushes. These
brushes can takeoff the protective coating.
White Sidewall Tires
Your GM dealer has a GM White SidewallTire Cleaner. You can use a stiff
brush with the cleaner.
6-75
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and
not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every
six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may
be required. (See “Recommended Fluids & Lubricants’’ in the Index.)
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement,
make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Foreign Material
Calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, and other foreign
matter can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain onpainted surfaces.
Use cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired
right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available
from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can
be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on
the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can
occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain
water. Clean any areas where mud andother debris can collect. Dirt packed
in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer or an underbody vehicle washing system can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout.
Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
6-76
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will repair, at no charge
to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever
comes first.
Appearance Care Materials Chart
PART NO.
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050244
1050427
I050429
1050729
1051055
1051398
1052870
105020 1
SIZE
PRODUCT
16 oz. (0.473L) Tar and Road
Oil Remover
USAGE
Removes old waxes,
polishes, tar and road
oil
16 02. (0.473L)Chrome
Removes rust and
Cleaner and
corrosion on chrome
and stainless steel
Polish
I6 oz. (0.473L) White Sidewall Cleans white and black
tires
Tire Cleaner
Spot and stain removal
32 02. (0.946L) Vinyl Leather
on leather or vinyl
Cleaner
16 02. (0.473L) Fabric Cleaner Spot and stain removal
on cloth and fabric
Glass cleaning and
23 oz. (0.680L) Glass Cleaner
spot cleaning on vinyls
Cleans vinyl and cloth
6 Ibs. (2.72 kg) Multi-Purpose
Powder Cleaner on door trim, seats,
and carpet-also tires
and mats.
Cleaning of vinyl tops
8 oz. (0.237L) Vinyl Top
Cleaner
Vinyl top dressing
16 oz. (0.4731) Preservatone
Spot and stain removal
8 02. (0.237L) Spot Lifter
on cloth and fabric
Exterior wash
16 oz. (0.473L) Wash-Wax
(conc.)
I6 oz. (0.473L) Magic Mirror
Exterior cleaner and
Cleaner-Polish
polish
6-77
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you
look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
6-78
Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.This code will help
you identify your engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
I-
4m
U
E
a
W f
I
A
P
0
cv
6-79
E
I
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box.
WHEELBASE
I
MODEL DESIGNATION
OPTION CONTENT
LC3 M X lM 3 1
K 1 9K 6 4
6 B6J2 6L2 U
67D
671
NA5 NB1 Q M X V K 3V C 2V Y V
l Y 4V 7 3Y 1 9Z J 7
679 7BJ
8HJ
BHJ
I
I
PAINT TECHNOLOGY
ORDER NUMBER
EXTERIOR COLORS
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
0
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information, and
a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Add-on E/ectrical Equipment
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check
with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
6-80
Specification Charts
Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest
information available at the time of printing, and are subject to change. If a
part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle
when it was built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM
truck dealer.
Engine Identification-Gas Engines
Engine
Type
VIN Code
Fuel System
Produced By
Emissions
5.7L
V8
K
TBIT
U.S., CAN.
JJD*/HD**
“Light Duty Emissions with 8500 GVWR and below or:
**Heavy Duty Emissions with 8501 GVWR and above
?Throttle Body Injection
Engine Identification -Diesel Engines
Engine
Type
VIN Code
Fuel System
Produced By
Emissions
6.5L
V8
S
Turbo Diesel
U.S.
LD
6.5L
V8
F
Turbo Diesel
U.S.
HD
DESCRIPTION
5 bolts (14mm)
6 bolts (14mm)
8 bolts (14mm)
TORQUE
120 ft. lbs. (1 60 Nom)
120 ft. lbs. ( 1 60 Nom)
I20 ft. Ibs. ( I 60 Nom)
Wheel Nut Torque
MODEL
C 1500
K 1500, C-K 2500
C-K 2500
6-81
Cooling System Capacity
ENGINE
VIN
5.7L
6.5L
6.5L
7.4L
K
S
F
N
QTY Without AfC*
17.5 Quarts ( 1 6.5 Liters)
25 Quarts (23.5 Liters)
QTY With A/C*
18 Quarts ( I7 Liters)
25 Quarts (23.5 Liters)
26.5 Quarts (25 Liters)
23 Quarts (22 Liters)
26.5 Quarts (25 Liters)
25 Quarts (23.5 Liters)
After refill, the level MUST be checked as outlined under “Engine Cooling
System” in Section 5.
*All quantities are approximate.
Crankcase Capacity
ENGINE
5.7L
6.5L
VIN
K
6.5L
7.4L
F?
N
QTY Without Filter“
4 Quarts (3.8 Liters)
QTY With Filter:$
5 Quarts (4.8 Liters)
7 Quarts (6.5 Liters)
7 Quarts (6.5 Liters)
7 Quarts (6.5 Liters)
ST
6 Quarts (5.7 Liters)
After refill, the level MUST be checked as outlined under “Engine Oil And
Filter Recommendations” in Section 5.
*All quantities are approximate.
?Oil filter should be changed at EVERY oil change.
Fuel Tank Capacity
QUANTITY
TYPE
Gasoline/Diesel
Utility Model -Standard
30 Gallons ( I 13 Liters)
Wagon Model-S tandard
42 Gallons ( I 59 Liters)
All quantities are for a completely dry tank andare approximate.
6-82
Service Replacement Part and Filter
Recommendations -Gas Engines
Engine
VIN
5.7L
7.4L
K
N
PF35
A348C
cv774c
.CR43TS
GF48 I
RC36
Oil Filter
PF353‘
Air Cleaner Filter
A348C
PCV Valve
cv774c
Spark Plugs‘%
.CR43TS
Fuel Filter
GF48 1
Radiator Cap
RC36
$Four Wheel Drive Vehicle -use
a PFS 1 oil filter
*Use AC copper-cored resister type spark plugs
Service Replacement Part and Filter
Recommendations -Diesel Engines
VIN
6.5L
S”
Oil Filter
PF3S
Engine
6.5L
F”
PF35
Air Cleaner
A917C
A9 17C
Fuel Filter
TP I 006
TP 1006
RC33
RC33
Surge Tank Cap
*Heavy Duty Emission Engine
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same. If the air conditioning
system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is
used. If you’re not sure, ask your GM dealer. For additional information, see
your “Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” booklet.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity
TYPE
Refrigerant R 134A
Refrigerant R 134A
QTY
Front A/C 3.0 lbs. (1.360 kg)
Front and Rear A/C 4.25 Ibs. ( I .927 kg)
6-83
Fuse Block
1
FUSE LEGEND
I
1 5 AMP I TAN 1
I 7.5 AMP I BROWN 1
I
I
I 25 AMP I
I 30 AMP I
CLEAR
GREEN
PANEL LPS
1
1
6-84
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
NAME
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
Cruise Control, 4 WD Display
Illum. Rear Window Defogger
Timer, Aux. Batt. Relay Feed,
Safety Belt Buzzer Timer,
Cluster Ign. Feed
Back-up Lamps, Turn Signals
Turn-B/U
T.C.C., Air Diverter, E.S.C.,
EMC/Ign
E.G.R., E.C.M. Ign. R.W.A.L.
Brake Switch
Throttle Body Injectors
Inj. A
A.B.S. Cluster-Speed0
Brake
H.V.A.C. 4 WD, Aux. Batt.
AC/Htr
Relay
Dome Lamp, Ctsy. and Glove
Ctsy
Box Lps. (TR-9), Radio
(Memory-Clock)
HornRelay, Horn Feed, Park
Park LP
Lamps
C49 SW Illum., Headlamp “On”
P. Lps
Warning, Radio Illum.,
H.V.A.C. Illum.
Haz. Flasher, Seat Belt Buzzer,
Stop/Haz.
Stop Lmps., A.B.S. Memory
Windshield Wiper, Washer
Wiper
Radio Feed
Radio
Pwr. Windows
Acc/Ign.
Door Locks,Rear Window
Acc/Batt.
Defogger
Crank, Discreet
Crank
Four Wheel Drive
4WD
Daytime Running Lights
DRL
Rear Window Wipermasher
RR Wpr.
Cigar Lighter, Rear Hatch
TIC Re1
Release
*An inline fuse is used for the underhood lamp
Gages
FUSE
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
20 Amp
15 Amp
10 Amp
10 Amp
15 Amp
25 Amp
20 Amp
20 Amp
5 Amp
15 Amp
25 Amp
10 Amp
30 Amp
30 Amp
5 Amp
25 Amp
15 Amp
25 Amp
25 Amp
Do not use fuses of higher amperage than those recommended above.
6-85
Lamp and Bulb Data
LAMP OR BULB
TRADE NO.
POWER
RATING AT
12.8V, WATTS
6052
55/65
i
H6054
35/65
2
6052
55/65
2
9005
65
2
HEADLAMPS
2 Headlamp
System
Halogen (Opt.)
4 Headlamp
System
Composite
TRADE NO.
LAMP OR BULB
EXTERIOR
Front Marker Lamp
Front Park and Turn Lamp
Rear Parking Lamp
Rear Stop and Turn Lamp
Backup Lamp
Roof Marker Lamp"
License Plate Lamp
Underhood Lamp
Reel Lamp
194
2
2357NA
4
3057
3057
3156
194
194
232
232
2
211-2
21 1-2
2
2
2
5
2
1
1
*Suburban Only
INTERIOR
Dome Lamps
Reading Lamps
Roof Console Lamps
I68
Courtesy Lamp
Heater or A/C Control Lamp
Four Wheel Drive Indicator
Four Wheel Drive Shift Lever
Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp
Ashtray Lamp
Sunshade Vanity Mirror
6-86
4
2
161
2
1
1
194
1
194
194
1
74
4
1003
194
1
TRADE NO.
LAMP OR BULB
INSTRUMENT P ANEL
Transmission Indicator (PRNDL)
161
Daytime Running Lights Indicator?'
74
Charging System Indicator Lamp
74
Instrument Cluster Illumination -Gage
Cluster
Instrument Cluster Illumination
-Tachometer Cluster
Headlamp Beam Indicator
194
194
Directional Signal Indicator
74
Brake Warning Indicator
74
Safety Belt Warning
74
Check Gages Indicator
74
Malfunction Indicator ("Service Engine
Soon") Lamp
Upshift Indicator
74
Glow Plugs Lamp*:"
74
Low Coolant Lamp**
74
Water in Fuel Lamp**
74
Service Throttle Soon Lamp**
74
'k*Dieselonly
'fCanadian Vehicles only
6-87
74
74
6
Notes
!
6-88
Scheduled Maintenance Services
Section
This section covers the maintenance required for your General Motors
vehicle . Your vehicle needs these services to retain it’s safety. dependability.
and emission control performance .
A Word About Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Recording Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-4
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting YourVehicle’s Maintenance Services . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 7-4
Gasoline Engines with Light Duty Emissions .
Maintenance Schedule I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Maintenance Schedule I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Gasoline Engines with Heavy Duty Emissions .
Maintenance Schedule I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 7-10
Maintenance Schedule I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Diesel Engines .
Maintenance Schedule I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14
Maintenance Schedule I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-22
Recommended Fluids & Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
Service Sta.tion Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Protection
Plan
Have you purchased theGM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements
the new vehicle warrantiesSee your GM dealer for details
.
.
7-1
A Word About Maintenance
We at General Motors wantto help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’lldrive it. You may drive
very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long
distances all the time in veryhot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their GM vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. You may even need more frequent checks and replacements than
you will find in the schedules in this section. So please read this section and
note how youdrive. If you have any questions on howto keep your vehicle
in good condition, see your GM dealer, the place many GM owners choose
to have their maintenance work done. Your dealer can be reliedupon to use
the proper parts and practices.
Your Vehicle andthe Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps keep your vehicle in good
working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance or the
removal of importantcomponents can significantly affect the qualityof the
air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or even the wrong tire inflation can
increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to help keep your vehicle in good condition, please
maintain your vehicle properly.
Recording Maintenance Services
The Maintenance Record near the end of this section provides
a place for
you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Whenever any
maintenance is performed, be sure to write it down in the Maintenance
Record. This will help you determine when your next maintenance should
be done. In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle warranty repairs.
7-2
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will
probably want to get the service information GM publishes. For information
on how to obtain various service publications for your vehicle, see “Service
Publications” in the Index. You will find a list of publications and an order
form in the back of the book.
Scheduled Maintenance Services
This part tells you the maintenance services that you should have done and
the times you should schedule them. Your GM dealer knows your vehicle
best and wants you to be happy with it. If you go to your dealer for your
service needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service people
will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within the recommended limits. You will
find these limits on your vehicle’s Certification Label. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
are driven on regular road surfaces, and within legal driving limits, as
described in Section 4 “Your Driving andthe Road.”
are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See “Off Road
Driving With Your Four-wheel Drive Vehicle” in the Index.
use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Proper Maintenance Services
To find the proper maintenance schedule for your vehicle, you must know
two things. What engine your vehicle has, andhow you use your vehicle.
Your engine type will tell you which chart to use, and your driving
conditions will tell you which schedule to use. The charts are found later in
this section.
Selecting the Proper Maintenance Chart
Your engine type (Gasoline or Diesel) and its emissions classification (Light
Duty or Heavy Duty Emissions) will tell you which maintenance chart to
use. Find your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and look at the eighth
character to see what your engine code is. Then use the following Engine
Emissions Classifications tables to find your emissions classification.
0
Your VIN is on the plate on the top left corner of your instrument
panel, the Certification Label and on the Service Parts Identification
Label. See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.
If your engine has more than one emissions classification, look at your
Certification Label to see what your Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
7-3
Engine Emissions Classification- Gas Engines
Engine
Type
VIN
Fuel System
Emissions
5.7L
7.44
V8
K
V8
N
TBIT
TBIT
LD*/HD**
LD*/HD**
*Light Duty Emissions with 8500 GVWR and belowor:
**Heavy Duty Emissions with 8501 GVWR and above
?Throttle Body Injection
Engine Emissions Classification- Diese/ Engines
Engine
Type
VIN
Fuel System
Emissions
6.5L
V8
S
Turbo Diesel
LD
7-4
6.5L
V8
F
Turbo Diesel
HD
Selecting the Proper Maintenance Schedule
Here is how to tell which schedule to follow once you find the proper
maintenance chart to use.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEI
Is any one of these true for your vehicle?
Most trips are less than 4 miles (6 kilometers.)
Most trips are less than 10 miles (16 kilometers), and the outside
temperatures are below freezing.
The engine is at low speed most of the time (as in door-to-door
delivery, stop-and-go traffic, or commercial use).
0
You operate in dusty areas or off-road frequently.
You tow a trailer.
If any one (or more) of these is true for your driving, follow Schedule I.
Schedule I is shown by a plus sign (+) on the chart.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE II
Follow Schedule I1 ONLY if none of theabove conditions are true.
Schedule I1 is shown by a dot ( 0 ) on the chart.
7-5
GASOLINE ENGINES WITH LIGHT
DUTY EMISSIONS
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE tf
-
23 Tire and Wheel Rotation**
t
24 Drive Axle Service**
t
t
t
t
t
-
t
25 Brake Systems Inspection**
* An Emission Control Service
** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index
$ The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failureto perform this
maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior
to the
completion of vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended
maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe
recorded.
t To determine the emissions classificationof your engine, refer to “Selecting the Proper
Maintenance Chart” in this section.
TO401/TO901
7-6
GASOLINE ENGINES WITH LIGHT
DUTY EMlSSlONS
- MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE fi (continued)
THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHART UP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE
DONE AFTER 60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS.
T0402/T0902
GASOLINE ENGINES WITH LIGHT DUTY EMISSIONS
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEI v
-
Item Service
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
14
15
17
23
24
25
* P 1 Emission Control Service
**
s 3e “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index.
to perform this
$ 7 le California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure
n aintenance itemwill not nullify the emission warranty
or limit recall liability priorto the
)mpletion of vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended
n aintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be
r( corded.
t T ) determine the emissions classificationof your engine, refer to “Selecting the Proper
hi aintenance Chart” in this section.
TO4031 r0903
C
I
7-8
THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHART UP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE
DONE AFTER 60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS.
T0403a/T0903a
7-9
GASOLINE ENGINES WITH HEAVY DUTY EMISSIONS
- MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEyf
Miles (000)
Kilometers (000)
Item Service
No.
3
5
I
1 Engine
Change*-Every
Oil
3 Months,
or
Filter
Change*-Every
Oil
3 Months,
or
Lubrication-Every
12 Months,
or
1 2 Chassis
3 Clutch Fork Ball Stud Lubrication (5-speed manual
transmission with deeplow only)
Cooling System Service*-Every 24 Monthsor
Air Cleaner Filter Replacement*
Front Wheel Bearing Repack
Transmission Service **
Fuel Filter Replacement*
10 Spark Plugs Replacement*
11 Spark Plug Wire Inspection*
12 EGR System Inspection*
13 Electronic Vacuum Regulator Valve (EVRV)
Inspection*
14 Engine TimingC h e c k k
15 Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection *
16 Thermostatically Controlled Air Cleaner
Inspectionk
17 Engine Accessory Drive (Serpentine) Belt
Inspection*
18 Evaporative Control System Inspection*
I9 Shields and Underhood Insulation InspectionA.
InspectionA.
System
Intake
20 Air
21
t
t
I+
I I
I
23
-
24
I
Inspection**
Systems Brake
* An Emission Control Service
** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
A A Noise Emission Control Service
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States
t To determine the emissions classificationof your engine, refer to “Selecting the Proper
Maintenance Chart” in this section.
TO404
7-10
GASOLINE ENGINES WITH HEAVY DUTY EMISSIONS
- MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE # (continued)
THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHART UP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE
DONE AFTER 60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS.
TO405
7-11
GASOLINE ENGINESWITH HEAVY DUTY EMISSIONS
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEIff
-
* An Emission Control Service
** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
A A Noise Emission Control Service
H Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States
t To determine the emissions classificationof your engine, refer to “Selecting the Proper
Maintenance Chart” in this section.
TO406
7- 12
GASOLINE ENGINES WITH HEAVYDUTY EMISSIONS
- MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEIFl (continued)
7- 13
DIESEL ENGINES- MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEfi
* conditions.
Change filter every 15,000 miles
000 km), except when operating i dusty
Dusty conditions may require more frequent filter replacemExtreme
(24
I
nt.
tl be checkedas
dust anddirt operating conditions (off-road), may require the air filter
often as every300 miles (483 km) and replacedas necessary.
* An Emission Control Service
** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in this section.
A A Noise Emission Control Service
Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States
t This maintenance schedule applies to all diesel engines available.
T0408D0908
1
7- 14
DIESEL ENGINES- MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEt"f
(continued)
THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHART UP TO 60,000 MILES (I00 000 km) ARE TO BE
DONE AFTER 60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS.
T0409lT0909
7- 15
Air
DlES€L ENGINES - MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEI f i
Item
No.
1
8 CDRV SystemInspection*
9 FuelFilterReplacement*
12 EGRSystemInspection*
17EngineAccessoryDrive(Serpentine)Belt
Inspection*
19ShieldsandUnderhoodInsulation
InspectionAH
20
InspectionAD
Thermostatically
21
Fan
Controlled
Cooling
Engine
CheckAH-Every 12 Months or
22ExhaustPressureRegulatorValve
Inspection*
Tire
23
0
rive
24
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
25 BrakeSystemsInspection**
* An Emission Control Service
** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in this section,
A A Noise Emission Control Service
H Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States.
t This maintenance scheduled applies to all diesel engines available.
TO4 1Oflo910
7-16
0
0
DIESEL ENGINES- MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE1fl
(continued)
THE SERVICES SHOWNON THIS CHART UP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE
DONE AFTER 60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS.
TO411/TO911
Explanation Of Scheduled Maintenance Services
Below are explanations of the services listed in the maintenance charts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in this section. Make sure
whoever services your vehicle uses these.All parts should be replaced and
all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
1. ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER CHANGE*-ALWAYS USE SH
ENERGY CONSERVIJTGTI (GASOLINE ENGINE) OR CF-4/SH
(DIESEL ENGINE) QUALITY OILS OF THE PROPER VISCOSITY.
To determine the preferred viscosity oilfor your vehicle’s engine
(e.g. SAE 5W-30 or low-30), see “Engine Oil” in the Index.
2. CHASSIS LUBRICATION - Lubricate the front suspension, king
pin bushings, steering linkage, transmission, and transfercase shift
linkage, parking brake cable guides, rear driveline center splines and
front axle propshaft splines, brake pedal springs, and clutch pedal
springs at the intervals specified.
Ball joints and king pin bushings should not be lubricated unless their
temperature is 10°F (-12”C), or higher. When the weather is cold, let
them warm up before lubricationor they could bedamaged.
Also, be sure to check all the vehiclefluid levels at this time.
3. CLUTCH FORK BALL STUD LUBRICATION (5-SPEED
MANUAL TRANSMISSIONWITH DEEP LOW ) - Not
applicable to utility or wagon models.
4. COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE*? - Drain, flush and refill system
with new coolant. See “Engine Coolant’’ in the Index for the proper
coolant and mixture to use in your vehicle.
Also inspect the hoses and replace themif they are cracked, swollen, or
deteriorated. Tighten all hose clamps (except constant tension clamps).
Remove debris and clean the outside of the radiator and air
conditioning condenser. Wash the radiator neck. To ensure proper
operation, pressure test the radiator andcap.
5. AIR CLEANER FILTER REPLACEMENT*- Replace at every
30,000 miles (50 000 km) ormore often under dusty conditions. Ask
your dealer for the proper replacement intervals for your driving
conditions.
6. FRONT WHEEL BEARING REPACK (2-WHEEL DRIVE
ONLY) - Clean and repack thefront wheel bearings ateach brake
relining, or at the specified interval, whichevercomes first.
4’ An
Emission Control Service
*A fluid loss in these systems may indicate a problem. Have them
inspected and repaired atonce.
7- 18
7. TRANSMISSION SERVICE;Automatic Transmission- Change the transmission fluid and filter
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km) for vehicles under 8,600 GVWR or
every 12,000 miles (20 000 km) for vehicles over 8,600 GVWR if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic.
0
Where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Frequent trailer pulling.
0
Uses such as taxi, police, delivery or other commercial service.
If the vehicle is not used mainly under anyof these conditions, change
the fluid and filter every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) for vehicles under
8,600 GVWR or every 24,000 miles (40 000 km) for vehicles over
8,600 GVWR see “Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index for
more information.
Manual Transmission- Transmission fluid does not require periodic
changing.
8. CDRV SYSTEM INSPECTION* - Check the Crankcase
Depression Regulator Valve System for any worn, plugged or collapsed
hoses. Have the system checked as described in the Service Manual.
9. FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT*$- Replace the fuel filter at the
specified interval or sooner if clogged.
10. SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT*- Replace spark plugs with the
type listed in Section 6. See “Specification Charts” in the Index.
1 1. SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION- Clean wires and inspect for
burns, cracks or other damage. Check the wire boot fit at the distributor
and atthe spark plugs. Replace wires as needed.
‘%
An Emission Control Service
$The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to
perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or
limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle useful life.
General Motors, however, urges that all recommended maintenance
services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be
recorded.
?A fluid loss in these systems may indicate a problem. Have them
inspected and repaired at once.
7-19
12. EGR SYSTEM INSPECTION*- Conduct EGR SYSTEM CHECK
as described in the Service Manual.
13. ELECTRONIC VACUUM REGULATOR VALVE (EVRV)
INSPECTION* - Inspect filter for excessive contamination or
plugging. If required, clean element witha solution of biodegradable
soap and water, let dry and reinstall element.
14. ENGINE TIMING CHECK AND DISTRIBUTOR CHECK (SOME
MODELS)*$ - Adjust timing to underhood label specifications.
Inspect the inside and outsideof the distributor cap and rotorfor cracks,
carbon tracking and corrosion. Clean or replace as needed,
15. FUEL TANK, CAP AND LINES INSPECTION*$
- Inspect the
fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Remove fuelcap, inspect
gasket for an even filler neck imprint, and any damage. Replace parts
as needed.
16. THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED AIR CLEANER
INSPECTION*A - (If so equipped.) Inspect all hoses andducts for
proper hook-up. Be sure the valve works properly.
17. SINGLE ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE (SERPENTINE) BELT
INSPECTION* - Inspect belt. Lookfor cracks, fraying, wear, and
proper tension. Adjust or replace as needed.
18. EVAPORATIVE CONTROL SYSTEM (ECS) INSPECTION*-
Check all fuel and vapor lines and hosesfor proper hookup, routing,
and condition. Check that the purge valve works properly,
if equipped.
Replace as needed.
19. SHIELDS AND UNDERHOOD INSULATION
INSPECTIONAV
- Inspect shields and underhood insulationfor damage or looseness.
Adjust or replace as required.
20. AIR INTAKE SYSTEMINSPECTIONAV - Check the air intake
system installation to see that gasketsare sealed properly and allhose
connections, fasteners, and other components are tight. Also check to
be sure that the air cleaner housing is properly seated, thatthe cover fits
tightly, and the wing nutsare tight. Tighten connections andfasteners
or replace damaged parts as required.
An Emission Control Service
'%
ANoise Emission Control Service
P'Applicable only to vehicles sold in the United States
$The California Air Resources Boardhas determined that the failureto
perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or
limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle useful life.
General Motors, however, urges thatall recommended maintenance
services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be
recorded.
7-20
2 I . THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED ENGINE COOLING
FAN INSPECTIONAI/ - (If so equipped.) Inspect all hoses and
ducts for proper hook-up. Be sure the valve works properly.
22. EXHAUST PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE INSPECTION”Check that the valve works properly,Correct any binding. Inspect
hoses for cracks, chafing or decay. Replace parts as needed.
23. TIRE AND WHEEL ROTATION AND INSPECTION - For proper
wear and maximum tire life, rotate tires at the first
6,000 miles (10 000
kilometers) for Schedule I (+) or 7,500 miles (12 500 kilometers) for
Schedule I1 ( 0 ) and then every 15,000 miles (25 000 kilometers)
thereafter. Follow the instructions and patterns shown in Section 6.
Check tires foruneven wear or damage. If irregular or premature wear is
apparent, check wheel alignment. Also, check or damaged wheels. See
“Tires” in the Index for more information.
For dual wheels, whenever the vehicle, wheels, or fasteners are new,
have the wheel fastener torque set at the first 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles
( 160, 1600 and 10 000 km).
Block the tires opposite those being removed to keep the vehicle from
rolling.
24. DRIVE AXLE SERVICE?- Check readfront axle fluid level and
add as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for
leaking.
0
Locking differential- Drain fluid at first oil change and refill.
Check fluid level and add as needed at subsequent oil changes. In
dusty areas, or trailer towing applications drain fluid at every
15,000 miles (24 135 kilometers) and refill.
Standard differential- Check fluid level and add as needed at
every oil change. In dusty areas, or trailer towing applications,
drain fluid every 15,000 miles (24 135 kilometers) and refill.
0
More frequent lubrication may be required on heavy-duty
off-road use.
or
An Emission Control Service
:i:
ANoise Emission Control Service
VApplicable only to vehicles sold in the United States
+A fluid loss in these systems may indicate a problem. Have them
inspected and repaired at once.
7-21
25. BRAKE SYSTEM INSPECTION?- When the engine oil is
changed, inspect the lines and hoses for proper hookup, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Check the parking brake adjust, and thefluid level
in the master cylinder. A low fluid level can indicate worn disc brake
pads which may need to be serviced.
When the wheels are removed for rotation, inspect disc brakepads for
wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Also inspect drum brakelinings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel
cylinders, parking brake, etc., atthe same time. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel and mountingsurfaces before mounting the wheel.
Inspect brakes more often if driving habits or conditions result in
frequent braking.
Owner Checks and Services
Listed below are owner checks and services which should be made at the
time period specified to help ensure proper safety, emission performance,
and dependability of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids
or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones,
as shown in this Section.
At Least Once a Month
Tire inflation pressure check
- Check the tires for proper inflation. If
they are low, inflate themto the level specified on the Certificatiomire
label or on the tire inflation charts. See “Loading Your Vehicle” or
“Inflation-Tire Pressure” in the Index.
At Least Once a Year
Key lock cylinder lubrication-Lubricate key lock cylinders with engine
oil. See the “Recommended Fluid and Lubricants” chartin this section.
Transmission neutral or clutch start switch operation
-
?A fluid loss in thesesystems may indicate a problem. Have them inspected
and repaired at once.
7-22
I . Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the manual parking brake and the Ye‘@lar brake. See
“Brakes” and “Parking Brake” in the Index. Do not use the accelerator
pedal.
3. Be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
4. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear.
The starter should work only in “P’ (Park) or “N” (Neutral).
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever in “N” (Neutral), push
the clutch down halfway, and tryto start the engine. The starter should work
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor.
Steering column lock operation
- While parked, try to turn the key to
LOCK in each gearshift position.
With an automatic transmission, the key should turn to LOCK only when
the gear shift is in “P” (Park).
On vehicles with a key release lever, try to turn the key to LOCK without
pressing the lever. The key should turn to LOCK only with the key lever
depressed.
On all vehicles, the key shouldcome out only in LOCK.
Parking brake and transmission“ P ’ (PARK) mechanism operation-
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your
foot on the regular brake, set the manual parking brake.
To check the parking brake: With the engine running and the
transmission in “N” (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
To check the “P” (Park) mechanism’s holding ability: Apply the regular
brake and shift to “P’ (Park). Release the manual parking brake, then
slowly release the regular brake.
7-23
Lap and Shoulder Belts Condition and Operation
- Inspect belt system,
including webbing, buckles, latch plates, retractors, guide loops and
anchors. Have a belt assembly replaced if the webbing has been cutor
otherwise damaged.
Body Lubrication Service- Lubricate all body door hinges with engine
oil. Also lubricate the tailgate, tailgate handle pivot points, and tailgate
mounted spare tire carrier (if equipped). Lubricate the body hood,fuel door
and rear compartment hinges, latches and locks including interiorglove box
and console doors, and any folding seat hardware. Lubricate the hood safety
lever pivot and prop rod pivot. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Periodic Maintenance Inspections- Listed below are inspections and
services which should be performed at least twicea year (for instance each
spring or fall). You should let your GM dealer’s service department or other
qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Steering and Suspension Inspection?
- Inspect front andrear suspension
and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or
lack of lubrication. Inspect power steering lines and hosesfor proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Lubricate the steering linkage.
Accelerator Control System- On gasoline engines, lubricate the pivot at
the TBI throttle lever stud withengine oil. Do not oil any accelerator or
cruise control cables. Replace any cables that have high effortor excessive
wear.
Exhaust System Inspection- Inspect the complete system including the
three-way catalytic converter. Inspect the body nearthe exhaust system.
Look for broken, damaged, missing or out-of-position parts, as well as,
open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could cause
a heat buildup in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes seep into the
passenger compartments.
Drive Axle Service?- Check readfront axle tluid level and addas needed,
Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive) Inspection+- Every 12 months or at
oil change intervals, check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant
when necessary. Oil the control lever pivot point and allexposed control
linkage. Check vent hose at transfercase for kinks and proper installation.
More frequent lubrication may be requiredon heavy-duty or off-road use.
?A fluid loss in these systems may indicate a problem. Have them inspected
and repaired atonce.
7-24
Recommended FIuids & Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or
specification may be obtained from your GM Dealer.
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine Oil -Gasoline
Engines
API service SH or SG Energy
Conserving I1 oils of the recommended
viscosity. The “SH” designation may be
shown alone or in combination with
others, such as “SH/CD,” “SH, SG,
CD,”“SG/CD,” etc. To determine the
preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see “Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Oil - Diesel Engines
API service C F 4 S H . The “ C F 4 S H ”
designation may be shown alone or in
combination with others, such as
“CF-4/SG,” “CE/SH” or “CE/SG,” etc.
The designation may also be listed in
reverse order, such as “SH/CF-4.” To
determine the preferred viscosity for
your vehicle’s engine, see “Engine Oil”
in the Index.
Mixture of water and a good quality
ethylene glycol base antifreeze
conforming to “GM Specification
6038-M” (GM Part No. 1052753),or
approved recycled coolant conforming to
“GM Specification 6038-M” with a
complete coolant flush and refill.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No.
12345347 or equivalent).
Delco Supreme 11 brake fluid (GM
Part No. 1052535 or equivalent DOT-3
brake fluid).
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Clutch System
Hydraulic Brake Systems
Parking Brake Cables
Power Steering System
Automatic Transmission
@
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
12346003 or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
No. 1050017 or equivalent) conforming
to “GM Specification 99850 10.”
D E X R O N ~TTI or D E X R O N ~IIE
Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7-25
USAGE
FLUIDLLUBRICANT
Manual Transmission:
5-Speed (RPO MG5)
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. I2345349 or equivalent).
Differential:
a. Standard (Saginaw) Front
and Rear Axle
a. Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. 105227I ) or SAE-80W-90
Gear Lubricant.
b. Locking
b. Axle Lubricant (GM Part No.
1052271) or SAE-SOW-90 Gear
Lubricant.
Transfer Case
D E X R O N ~111 or D E X R O N ~IIE
Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Gas Line De-Icer (GM Part No. 10515 16
or equivalent).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
12346003 or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Gas Line
Column Shift, Transfer Case,
Shift Lever, and Propeller
Shaft
Hood Latch Assembly
a. Pivots and spring anchor
a. Engine Oil (GM Part No. 1050109 or
equivalent).
b. Release Pawl
b. Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
12346003 or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Wheel Bearing Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12346003 or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
Category GC or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant (GM PartNo.
12346003 or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Engine Oil (GM Part No. 1050109 or
equivalent).
Front Wheel Bearings
Propeller Shaft
Spline/Universal Joint
Automatic Transmission Shift
Linkage, Floor Shift Linkage,
Hood and Door Hinges, Body
Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate
Hinge and Linkage, Folding
Seat, Fuel Door Hinge
7-26
USAGE
Key Lock Cylinders
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine Oil (GM Part No. 1050109 or
equivalent) ora synthetic light weight
engine oil (SAE 5W-30).
Chassis Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No.
I2346003 or equivalent) orlubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Windshield Washer Solvent
and Anti-Freeze
Weatherstrip Squeaks
GM Optikleen washer solvent (GM Part
No. 105I5 15 or equivalent).
Spray-A-Squeek (GM Part No.
1052277).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12345 120 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot
Points
7-27
Maintenance Record
After each of the preceding Scheduled Maintenance Services is performed,
record the date, odometer reading, services performed (listitem numbers)
and who performed the services in the appropriate column. In addition,
retain copies of your receipts. Itis suggested that receipts be kept withyour
Owner's Manual.
7-28
Service Station Checks
It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these
under-hood checks at each fuel fill.
Check the engine oil level and add if necessary.
Check the engine coolantlevel in the recovery bottle and add if
necessary.
Check the windshield washer fluid level and add if necessary.
See these items in the Index for information on how to check them.
7-29
'
Secondary
Hood Release
See Page 6-14.
Battery
Your vehicle's
Delco Freedom
battery never
needs t o have
water added.
See Page 6-49.
ILL
\
a Cooling System
Check and add
coolant only at
the coolant
recovery tank
(gasoline engine)
or only at the
coolant surge
tank (diesel
engine). The fluid
level should be at
the COLD mark.
See Page 6-35.
\
1
~
Transmission
Fluid
See Page 6-28.
\ Cold Tire
Pressure
See the
Certificationflire
label on the
inside rear edge
of the driver's
door.
See Page 6-62.
7-30
Customer AssistanceInformation
Section
Here you will find outhow to contact Chevroletif you need assistance. This
section also tellsyou how to obtain service publications and how to report
any safety defects.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired (TDD)
. . . . . 8-3
GM Participation in BBB AUTO LINE - Alternative Dispute Resolution
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Reporting Safety DefectsTo The United States Government . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Reporting Safety Defects To The Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Reporting Safety Defects To General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and Chevrolet.
Normally, any concern with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s Sales or Service Departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned,
misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE - Discuss your concern with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns can often be quickly resolved at that level
If the matter has already been reviewed with the Sales, Service, or Parts
Manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the General Manager.
STEP TWO - If after contacting amember of dealership management, it
appears your concern cannotbe resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contactGM of Canada CustomerAssistance
Center in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
In Mexico, call (525) 254-3777. In Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, call
1-809-763-13 15. In all other overseas locations, contact GM North
American Export Salesin Canada by calling 1 4 16-644-4 1 12. As of
October 4, 1993, call 1-905-6444 1 12.
For prompt assistance, please have the following information available to
give the Customer Assistance Representative:
0
Your name, address, home and business telephone number
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle
registration or title, or the plate at the left top of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
0
Nature of concern
We encourage you to call the toll free number listed previously in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Chevrolet, write to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet CustomerAssistance Center
P. 0. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
addresses of Canadian and GM overseas offices.
8-2
When contacting Chevrolet, please rememberthat your concern will likely
be resolved in the dealership, using the dealership’s facilities, equipment
and personnel. That iswhy we suggest you follow Step One firstif you have
a concern.
Customer Assistance for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired (TDD)
To assist customers whohave hearing difficulties, Chevrolet has installed
special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipmentat its
Customer Assistance Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD ora conventional teletypewriter (TTY)can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-TDD-CHEV
(1-800-833-2438). (TDD users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
GM Participation in BBB AUTO LINE Alternative Dispute Resolution Program*
*This program may not be available in all states, depending on state law.
Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistanceinformation
booklet. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations
and/or to discontinue itsparticipation in this program.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed to
making sure
you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. Our experiencehas
shown if a situation ariseswhere you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, that the Customer Satisfaction Proceduredescribed
earlier in this section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third-party can assist in arriving
at a solution to a disagreement regarding vehicle repairsinterpretation
or
of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements Chevrolet voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better
Business Bureau system to settle disputesbetween customers and
automobile manufacturers.This program is available freeof charge to
customers who currently own or lease aGM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after followingthe Customer Satisfaction Procedure,
you may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number, or write
them at the following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA
Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100 22203
8-3
To file a claim,you will be asked to provide your name and address, your
vehicle identification number (VIN), and a statement of the nature of your
complaint. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and other
factors.
We prefer you utilize the customer satisfaction procedure before you resort
to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will
attempt toresolve the complaint serving as an intermediary between you
and Chevrolet. If this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be
scheduled where eligible customersmay present their case to an impartial
third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may accept or reject. If you
accept the decision,GM will be bound by that decision. The entire dispute
resolution procedure should ordinarily take about forty days from the time
you file a claim until a decision is made.
Some state lawsmay require you to use this program before filing a claim
with a state-run arbitration program or in the courts. For further
information, contact the BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet
Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-222-1 020.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crashor
could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if
it finds that a safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order arecall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the
Hotline.
8-4
REPORTING SAFETYDEFECTS TO THE
CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle hasa safety defect,
you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying
General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada,Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario K1G 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSTO
GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like
this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020 ,
or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P. 0. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French). Or, write:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L 1 H 8P7
8-5
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customersatisfaction,
Chevrolet is excited to provide the services of the ChevroletlGeo Roadside
Assistance Center.
24-Hour Roadside AssistanceNumber
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, by calling
I-800-CHEV USA (1-800-243-8872).
This toll-free number will provide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems.
If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone, our advisorshave access
to a nationwide network of dealer recommended service providers. The
following services are available:
Towing
Locksmith
Tire repair
Rental car or taxi
Additional services as necessary
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that will provide you with
quality and priority service. When roadside services arerequired, our
advisors will explain any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistancewhen calling, please have the following available to
give tothe advisor:
Vehicle Identification Number
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
0
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive RoadsideAssistance
program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the U.S.A. Please refer to
the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1-800-268-6800 for
emergency services.
8-6
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportationfor customers needing
warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in
TO
conjunction with the coverage provided by the BUMPER
BUMPER New Vehicle Limited Warranty to retail purchasers of1994
ChevroletIGeo passengercar and light duty trucks.
In Canada, please consult yourGM Dealer for information on
courtesy transportation.
COURTESY TRANSPORTATION INCLUDES:
0 One way SHUTTLE RIDE for any warranty repair.
0 Up to $30 maximum daily VEHICLE RENTAL allowance for any
overnight warranty repairup to 5 days.
Up to $30 maximum daily CAB, BUS, or OTHER transportation
allowance in lieu of rental for any overnight warranty repair up to5
days.
Up to $10 daily FUEL allowance for rides provided by another person
(i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieuof rental for any overnight warranty
repair up to 5 days.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered
by your Chevrolet/Geo dealership service management. Claim amounts
should reflectall actual costs.
0
ChevroletlGeo Courtesy Transportation Program is not part
of the
BUMPER TO BUMPER New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet/Geo reserves the right to make
any changes or discontinue
the Courtesy Transportation Program at any time without notification.
For additional program details, contact your Chevrolet/Geo dealer.
Service Publications
Information on how to obtain Product Service Publications (PSP’s) and
U.S. states (and
Indexes as described below is applicable only in the fifty
the Districtof Columbia) and onlyfor cars and light truckswith GVWR less
than 10,000pounds (4 536 kg).
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins and Indexes
can be obtained by writing to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Service Publications Department
1908 Colonel Sam Dr.
Oshawa, OntarioL 1H 8P7
Chevrolet regularly sends its dealers useful service bulletins about
in the field.
Chevrolet products. Chevrolet monitors product performance
We then prepare bulletins for servicing our products better.Now, you can
get these bulletins too.
8-7
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the proper use and care of
your vehicle. Some describecostly repairs. Others describe inexpensive
repairs which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid future costly
repairs. Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or unexpected
condition. Others describe a quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can help
a technician service your vehicle better.
Most bulletins apply to conditionsaffecting a small number of cars or
trucks. Your Chevrolet dealer or a qualified technician may have to
determine if a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.
You can subscribe to all Chevrolet’s bulletins by calling Helm, Inc. at
1-800-7824356. This way you’ll get them as they become available.
Individual PSP’s
If you don’t want to buy all the PSP’s issued by Chevrolet forall car or
truck models in the model year, you can buy individual PSP’s, such as those
which may pertain to a particular model. To do this, you will first need to
see our index of PSP’s. It provides a variety of information. Here’s what
you’ll find in the index and how you can get one:
What You’ll Find in the Index:
A list of PSP’s published by Chevrolet in a model year (1990 or later).
PSP’s coveringall models of Chevrolet cars or light trucks (less than
10,000 pounds (4 536 kg) GVWR) are listed in the same index.
0
Ordering information so you can buy the specific PSP’s you may want.
0
Price information for the PSP’s you may want to buy.
How You Can Get an Index:
Indexes arepublished periodically. Most of the PSP’s which could
potentially apply to the most recent Chevrolet models will be listed in the
most recent publication for that model year. This means you may want to
wait until the end of the model year before ordering an index, if you are
interested in buying PSP’s pertaining to a currentmodel year car ortruck.
Some PSP’s pertaining to a particular model year vehicle may be published
in later years, and these would be listed in the later year’s index. When you
order an index for amodel year that is not over yet, we’ll send you the most
recently published issue. Check the ordering form for indexes for earlier
model years.
Lut out the ordering form, fill it out, and mail it in. We will then see to it
that an index is mailed to you. There is no charge for indexes for the
1989-1994 model years.
8-8
Toll-Free Telephone Number
If you want an additional orderingform for an index,just call toll-free and
we’ll be happy to send you one. Automated recording equipment will take
your name and mailingaddress. The number to callis 1-800-55 14123.
Copies at Participating Dealers
Copies of Indexes and individual PSP’s are
at your participating Chevrolet
dealer. You can ask to see them.
A VERY IMPORTANT REMINDER: These PSP’s are meant for
technicians. Theyare not meant for the “do-it-yourselfer.’’ Technicians
have the equipment, tools, safety instructions, and know-how to do a job
quickly and safely.
Chevrolet reserves the right to
change these procedures without notice.
Chevrolet Service Publications
You can get these ProductService Publications by using the order form.You
can also get Service Manuals and Owner Publications.
8-9
I
i
s
i=
cn
w
c
I
2
0
t
4
a
P
P
L
I I
I I
I
Index
A
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.5.8,3
Rear (Wagon Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Refrigerant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-83
SystemControls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Antenna,FixedMast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Alternative Dispute Resolution Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
Antilock
Brakes
(See “Brakes”) System
Warning
Light
2-68
Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Audiosystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
AMRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck and Equalizer . . . . . . . . 3-18
CassetteDeck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
Cassette Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22
AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32,6-33
6-35
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
RearLockin e; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
Belts (See “Safety Belts”)
BetterBusinessBureau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-33
Brakes
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
AntilockWarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Four-wheel Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Hydro-BoostSystem (Hydraulic Pump) ...........................
642
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4 3
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-26
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-45
ReplacingParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46
System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36, 4 4 0
Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
645
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
InEmergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Break-In,NewVehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
BulbReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
Replacement Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-86
1
C
Capacities and Specification
Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 1,4-33, 4-4 1
Cassette Tape Player (see “Audio Systems” )
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-58
CertificatiodTire Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
ChangingaFlatTire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Child Restraints (See “Safety Belts”)
Cigarette LightedAshtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Circuit Breakers (See “Fuses”)
Cleaning
Finishcare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-75
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
InsideofVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Instrument Panel, Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-73
Outside of Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-74
Special Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-72
Vinyl or Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-73
WheelsandTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16, 3-19
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Console
Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
ConvenienceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Coolant (See “Engine”)
Cooling System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-82
Crankcase Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-82
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-42
Increasespeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
OnHills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-45
Reducespeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-44
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-43
ToGetOutOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
246
Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
DomeLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-49
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-5
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Driving
Across an Incline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
AfterOff-RoadDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23
2
Driving (continued)
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-4
Control of A Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-27
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-29
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-26
InCity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InRain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
In Sand, Mud, Ice, Or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21, 5-40
InWater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22
LongDistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4-10
LossofControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Roading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
OnCurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
4-42
OnGrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
OnOff-Road Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
4-31
OnSnoworIce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-11
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stuck in Deep Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33, 5-40
Throughwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 4-22
Uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
WithaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
E
Electrical System
Add-on Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-80
Engine
Adding Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14,5-20. 6-37
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 9,3-5, 6-21
Computer Command Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-75
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-82
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................................
2-31
Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79, 6-81
Leaving Vehicle While Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
Oil (See “Oil”)
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................
2-13, 2-16
Equipment. Add-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
3
FanNoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24
Filter Replacement Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-83
Finish
6-69
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Fluid
AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
6-44
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-82
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Hydraulicclutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33
Leakcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
ManualTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-31
PowerSteering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34
7-25
RecommendedFluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33,6-34
TransferCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41, 6-42
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32,6-34
TransferCase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33,6-34
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6-4
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FillingYourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
6-12
ForeignCountries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-74
6-5
Gasolines for Cleaner Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-82
Tankcapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56,6-85
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-57
6-57
Trailer Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56
WindshieldWipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G
Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FuelGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
2-74
2-75
2-74
2-65
2-76
2-67
2-66
2-65
2-77
2-56
HalogenBulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
HeadRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 6-50
6-51
Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
High-LowBeam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-73
2-48
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50, 6-86
6-50
SealedBeam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating System (with N C ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Rear (Wagon Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
3-11
RearWindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Heating System (without A X ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
FanKnob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
FunctionLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RearWindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
TemperatureLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-39
Hood
LatchesandHinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6-14
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-37
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HydraulicClutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
If You’re Stuck in Sand. Mud. Ice. or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Ignitionswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Inflation-Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Instrumentpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Standardcluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
5-26
JackandTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
K
KeyReleaseLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
2-13
2-3
L
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Brake SystemWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-67
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-70
CheckGagesLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Front Parking/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Headlights (See “Headlights”)
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
2-37
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-49
2-7 1. 6-59
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
6-86
ReplacementChart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SideMarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
Loading YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12,6-59
6-61
Add-onEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48
AcceleratorControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Constant Velocity Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Front Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6-46
Front Suspension and Steering Linkage ............................
Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46
6-49
TailgateHandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HoodLatchesandHinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Lockcylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6-48
Propeller Shaft Slip Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33
RecommendedLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-25
Transfercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34
Luggagecarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Maintenance
Otherltems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2. 72.7
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 4 7 - 1 8
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
Master Cylinder (See “Brakes”)
2-51
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-38
Turn SignalLane Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
...
ModelReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-65
Off-Road Driving (See "Driving")
Off-RoadRecovery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16.6-22
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21,6-26
6-2 I , 6-26
Disposal of Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
6-16.6-22
ToCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17. 6-24
What Kind to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whe~ltoAdd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16, 6-23
Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21. 6-26
7-22
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking
2-27
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-27 4-52
YourVehicle (Manual Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
2-26
Parkin,o Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passin! Other Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Power
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
4-7
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-40
Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-64
Product Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
.
RadiatorPressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39
Radio (see "Audio Systems")
RearWindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
RecoveryHooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5
Road Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5
RockingYourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73
Checking Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-43
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-33
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-31
DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-19
7
Safety Belts (continued)
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-42
Lapshoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
LargerChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-40
Properwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Questions & Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1-28
RearSeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
ReminderLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-43
1-26
RightFrontPassenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Small Children andBabies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-26
1-14
WhyTheyWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-39
Safety Warningsand Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 4 7 - 1 8
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-6
Easy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ManualFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3
PowerDriver’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RearFolding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-5
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10
Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SeatbackLatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
Secondary Air Injection (AIR System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-59
Service
Do-It-Yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Replacement Parts and Filter Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
2-7 1, 6-59
Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-29
Service Station Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25, 2-72
2-28
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-47
Single Belt Accessory Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SpareTire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5-37
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-81
Specification Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-65
Starting yourEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13, 2-16
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
ColumnShiftLever ............................................
2-28
In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-63
Sunvisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
b
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
6-40
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tiltwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
6-62
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-69
ChangingaFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25
5-24
Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HubCapsandWheelNutCaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32
InspectionandRotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-64
6-59
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-66
6-62
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare (See “Spare Tire”)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
UniformTireQualityGrading
TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-27
Towing A Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Backingup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Following Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
441
4-39
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-44
5-7
TowingYourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TrailerBrakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-40
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
WiringHarness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Trailering Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33,6-34
Transmission
2-14
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Five-SpeedManual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6-31
Fluid, ToAdd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid, To Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
Four-wheel (See “Four-wheel Drive”)
ShiftLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
Tripodometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-65
Vehicle
Damage Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-78
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12. 6-59
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
649
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii
VentilationSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
AirVents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
9
W
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-66
(Also See "Lights")Bevices. Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-67
Aluminum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Hub CapsNheel Nut Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22
NutTorque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-47. 6-81
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Used Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-68
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
Rearwasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41. 6-42
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-50
Wipers. Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Blade Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-47
Cleaning Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Rearwindow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
10
C - 9409
I
t
.'
B
CERTIFIED
t
-Y
d
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
..